[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025096943A1 - Managing channel state information resource and report configurations - Google Patents

Managing channel state information resource and report configurations Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025096943A1
WO2025096943A1 PCT/US2024/054120 US2024054120W WO2025096943A1 WO 2025096943 A1 WO2025096943 A1 WO 2025096943A1 US 2024054120 W US2024054120 W US 2024054120W WO 2025096943 A1 WO2025096943 A1 WO 2025096943A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
configuration
ltm
implementations
cell
message
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/US2024/054120
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Chih-Hsiang Wu
Ching-Jung Hsieh
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Google LLC
Original Assignee
Google LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Google LLC filed Critical Google LLC
Publication of WO2025096943A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025096943A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/08Access point devices
    • H04W88/085Access point devices with remote components

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to wireless communications and, more particularly, to managing channel state information (CSI) resource and report configurations for a user equipment (UE).
  • CSI channel state information
  • the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) sublayer of the radio protocol stack provides services such as transfer of user-plane data, ciphering, integrity protection, etc.
  • the PDCP layer defined for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) radio interface (see 3 rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) technical specification (TS) 36.323) and New Radio (NR) (see 3GPP TS 38.323) provides sequencing of protocol data units (PDUs) in the uplink direction (from a user device, also known as a user equipment (UE), to a base station) as well as in the downlink direction (from the base station to the UE).
  • EUTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • TS Technical specification
  • NR New Radio
  • the PDCP sublayer provides signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs) to the Radio Resource Control (RRC) sublayer.
  • SRBs signaling radio bearers
  • DRBs data radio bearers
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the UE and a base station can use SRBs to exchange RRC messages as well as non-access stratum (NAS) messages, and can use DRBs to transport data on a user plane.
  • UEs can use several types of SRBs and DRBs.
  • DC dual connectivity
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • So-called SRB1 resources carry RRC messages, which in some cases include NAS messages over the dedicated control channel (DCCH), and SRB2 resources support RRC messages that include logged measurement information or NAS messages, also over the DCCH but with lower priority than SRB1 resources.
  • SRB1 and SRB2 resources allow the UE and the MN to exchange RRC messages related to the MN and embed RRC messages related to the SN, and also can be referred to as MCG SRBs.
  • SRB3 resources allow the UE and the SN to exchange RRC messages related to the SN, and can be referred to as SCG SRBs.
  • Split SRBs allow the UE to exchange RRC messages directly with the MN via lower layer resources of the MN and the SN.
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the MN can be referred as MCG DRBs
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the SN can be referred as SCG DRBs
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of both the MCG and the SCG can be referred to as split DRBs.
  • the UE in some scenarios can concurrently utilize resources of multiple radio access network (RAN) nodes (e.g., base stations or components of a distributed base station), interconnected by a backhaul.
  • RAN radio access network
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • this type of connectivity is referred to as Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity (MR-DC).
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary' node
  • PSCell primary' secondary cell
  • the UE communicates with the MN (via the PCell) and the SN (via the PSCell).
  • the UE utilizes resources of one base station at a time.
  • One base station and/or the UE determines that the UE should establish a radio connection with another base station. For example, one base station can determine to hand the UE over to the second base station, and initiate a handover procedure.
  • the RAN configures the UE to transmit layer 3 (L3) measurement results. Based on L3 measurement results received from the UE, the RAN transmits a RRC reconfiguration message configuring Reconfiguration with Synchronization (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message includes a ReconflgurationWithSync IE) for change of the serving cell (e.g., PCell or PSCell).
  • L3 layer 3
  • the RRC reconfiguration message includes a ReconflgurationWithSync IE
  • the serving cell e.g., PCell or PSCell.
  • the RAN In cases where the UE operates in carrier aggregation (CA) of at least one secondary cell (SCell) with the PCell or PSCell, the RAN has to release the at least one SCell due to the change of the PCell or PSCell.
  • the serving cell change involves complete L2 (and LI) resets, leading to longer latency, larger overhead and longer interruption time.
  • 3GPP recently launched anew work item, described in RP-221799, to develop new mobility techniques for serving cell changes. These techniques aim to reduce latency and overhead, and are called low-layer triggered mobility (LTM) cell switch, or faster serving cell switching.
  • LTM low-layer triggered mobility
  • the RAN transmits a serving configuration to the UE and communicates with the UE via a serving cell based on the serving configuration.
  • the serving configuration includes a plurality of configuration parameters for communication between the UE and RAN.
  • the serving configuration includes configuration parameters for a first radio bearer (e.g., SRB or DRB).
  • the RAN communicates with the UE via the serving cell, the RAN receives one or more layer 3 (e.g., RRC) measurement results from the UE. Based on the layer 3 (L3) measurement result(s), the RAN determines to configure a LTM candidate cell for LTM cell switch.
  • a first radio bearer e.g., SRB or DRB
  • the RAN receives one or more layer 3 (e.g., RRC) measurement results from the UE.
  • L3 layer 3
  • the RAN determines to configure a LTM candidate cell for LTM cell switch.
  • the RAN transmits a LTM configuration configuring the LTM candidate cell to the UE via RRC signaling.
  • the RAN includes the configuration parameters for the first radio bearer in the LTM configuration.
  • the RAN receives one or more layer 1 (LI) measurement results from the UE. Based on the one or more LI measurement result(s), the RAN determines that the LTM candidate cell qualifies to be a serving cell for the UE. Therefore, the RAN transmits a LTM cell switch command to the UE to command the UE to perform the LTM cell switch to the LTM candidate cell.
  • the UE performs a cell change from the serving cell to the LTM candidate cell in response to the LTM cell switch command.
  • the UE In response to the cell change, the UE disconnects from the serving cell and accesses the LTM candidate cell. After the UE successfully accesses the LTM candidate cell, the UE communicates with the RAN via the LTM candidate cell and the LTM candidate cell becomes a new serving cell for the UE.
  • the RAN configures CSI resources for the UE to measure.
  • LI measurement results i.e., channel state information (CSI) report
  • the RAN configures CSI resources for the UE to measure.
  • a CU can transmit a single LTM CSI resource configuration for a UE to a DU as specified in R3-235894.
  • the CU may have multiple LTM CSI resource configurations for the UE. In such cases, it is not clear how the CU transmit the LTM CSI resource configurations to the DU.
  • the CU may need to update the LTM CSI resource configuration(s) that were transmitted to the DU, which is not supported in R3-235894.
  • a distributed unit (DU) of a base station receives, from a central unit (CU) of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report.
  • the DU transmits, to the CU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report.
  • the second list of CSI resources is selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • the DU receives, from the CU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • the DU transmits, to the CU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • a CU of the base station transmits, to a DU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report.
  • the CU receives, from the DU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report.
  • the second list of CSI resources is associated with the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • the CU transmits, to a UE, a first indication of the second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report.
  • the CU transmits, to the DU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • the CU receives, from the DU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example system in which a radio access network (RAN) and a user device can implement the techniques of this disclosure for managing conditional procedures related to a secondary node (SN);
  • RAN radio access network
  • SN secondary node
  • Fig. IB is a block diagram of an example base station including a central unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) that can operate in the system of Fig. 1A;
  • CU central unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Fig. 2A is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with base stations;
  • FIG. 2B is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with a CU and a DU;
  • Fig. 3 is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that includes a CU and a DU, where the DU operates the cell.
  • Fig. 4 is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that includes a CU, a source DU (S-DU), and a target DU (T-DU).
  • Fig. 5A is a signaling diagram illustrating a first base station that operates as an MN and a second base station that operates as an SN.
  • Fig. 5B is a signaling diagram where the SN transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the MN and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the MN.
  • Fig. 6A is a signaling diagram illustrating a first base station that operates as an MN and a second base station that operates as an SN.
  • Fig. 6B is a signaling diagram where the SN transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the MN and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the MN.
  • Fig. 7A is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that operates as an MN and an SN.
  • Fig. 7B is a signaling diagram where the CU transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the M-DU and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the M-DU.
  • Fig. 8A is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that operates as an MN and an SN.
  • Fig. 8B is a signaling diagram where the CU transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the M-DU and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the M-DU.
  • FIGs. 9A-9C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a DU.
  • FIGs. 10A-10C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a CU.
  • FIGs. 11 A-l 1C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a DU.
  • FIGs. 12A-12C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a CU.
  • Fig. 1A depicts an example wireless communication system 100 in which communication devices can implement these techniques.
  • the wireless communication system 100 includes a UE 102, a base station (BS) 104, a base station 106 and a core network (CN) 1 10.
  • the UE 102 initially connects to the base station 104.
  • the base station 104 can perform an SN addition to configure the UE 102 to operate in dual connectivity (DC) with the base station 104 and the base station 106.
  • the base stations 104 and 106 operate as an MN and an SN for the UE 102. respectively.
  • the base station 104 can be implemented as a master eNB (MeNB) or a master gNB (MgNB), and the base station 106 can be implemented as a secondary gNB (SgNB).
  • the UE 102 can communicate with the base station 104 and the base station 106 via the same RAT such as EUTRA or NR, or different RATs.
  • the base station 104 is an MeNB and the base station 106 is a SgNB
  • the UE 102 can be in EUTRA-NR DC (EN-DC) with the MeNB and the SgNB.
  • an MeNB or an SeNB is implemented as an ng-eNB rather than an eNB.
  • the base station 104 is a Master ng-eNB (Mng-eNB) and the base station 106 is a SgNB
  • the UE 102 can be in next generation (NG) EUTRA-NR DC (NGEN-DC) with the Mng-eNB and the SgNB.
  • NG next generation
  • NGEN-DC EUTRA-NR DC
  • the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is an SgNB
  • the UE 102 may be in NR-NR DC (NR-DC) with the MgNB and the SgNB.
  • NR-DC NR-NR DC
  • the UE 102 may be in NR-EUTRA DC (NE-DC) with the MgNB and the Sng-eNB.
  • NE-DC NR-EUTRA DC
  • the base stations 104 and 106 operate as the source base station (S-BS) and a target base station (T-BS), respectively.
  • the UE 102 can operate in DC with the base station 104 and an additional base station (not shown in Fig. 1A) for example prior to the handover.
  • the UE 102 can continue to operate in DC with the base station 106 and the additional base station or operate in single connectivity (SC) with the base station 106, after completing the handover.
  • the base stations 104 and 106 in this case operate as a source MN (S-MN) and a target MN (T-MN), respectively.
  • a core network (CN) 110 can be an evolved packet core (EPC) 111 or a fifthgeneration core (5GC) 160, both of which are depicted in Fig. 1A.
  • the base station 104 can be an eNB supporting an SI interface for communicating with the EPC 111, an ng-eNB supporting an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160, or a gNB that supports an NR radio interface as well as an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160.
  • the base stations 104 and 106 can support an X2 or Xn interface.
  • the EPC 111 can include a Serving Gateway (SGW) 112, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) 114, and a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) 1 16.
  • SGW Serving Gateway
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • PGW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • the SGW 112 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • PGW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • the SGW 112 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc.
  • the MME 114 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions.
  • the PGW 116 provides connectivity from the UE to one or more external packet data networks, e.g.. an Internet network and/or an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • IMS Internet Multimedia Subsystem
  • the 5GC 160 includes a User Plane Function (UPF) 162 and an Access and Mobility Management (AMF) 164, and/or Session Management Function (SMF) 166.
  • the UPF 162 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc.
  • the AMF 164 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions
  • the SMF 166 is configured to manage PDU sessions.
  • the base station 104 supports cell 124A, and the base station 106 supports a cell 126.
  • the cells 124 A and 126 can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, where one of the base stations 104 and 106 is an MN and the other is an SN.
  • the base station 104 can support additional cell(s) such as cells 124B and 124C, and the base station 106 can support additional cell(s) (not shown in Fig. 1A).
  • the cells 124A. 124B, and 124C can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in earner aggregation (CA) with the base station 104.
  • CA earner aggregation
  • the base station 104 can operate the cells 124A, 124B, and 124C via one or more transmit and receive points (TRPs). More particularly, when the UE 102 is in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, one of the base stations 104 and 106 operates as an MeNB, an Mng-eNB or an MgNB, and the other operates as an SgNB or an Sng-eNB.
  • TRPs transmit and receive points
  • the wireless communication network 100 can include any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. More particularly, the EPC 111 or the 5GC 160 can be connected to any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. Although the examples below refer specifically to specific CN types (EPC, 5GC) and RAT types (5GNR and EUTRA), in general the techniques of this disclosure also can apply to other suitable radio access and/or core network technologies such as sixth generation (6G) radio access and/or 6G core network or 5G NR-6G DC.
  • 6G sixth generation
  • the base station 104 is equipped with processing hardware 130 that can include one or more general-purpose processors (e.g., CPUs) and anon- transitory computer-readable memory storing instructions that the one or more general-purpose processors execute. Additionally or alternatively, the processing hardware 130 can include special-purpose processing units.
  • the processing hardware 130 can include a PHY controller 132 configured to transmit data and control signal on physical downlink (DL) channels and DL reference signals with one or more user devices (e g. UE 102) via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • DL physical downlink
  • UE 102 user devices
  • cells e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C
  • the PHY controller 132 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical uplink (UL) channels and/or UL reference signals with the one or more user devices via one or more cells (e.g.. the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the processing hardware 130 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 134 configured to perform MAC functions with one or more user devices.
  • the MAC functions include a random access (RA) procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and/or communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the one or more user devices.
  • the MAC functions include lower triggered mobility 7 (LTM) related functions as described below.
  • the processing hardware 130 can further include an RRC controller 136 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
  • the RRC controller 132 may be configured to support RRC messaging associated with handover procedures, and/or to support the necessary 7 operations when the base station 104 operates as an MN relative to an SN or as an SN relative to an MN.
  • the base station 106 can include processing hardware 140 that is similar to processing hardware 130.
  • components 142. 144, and 146 can be similar to the components 132, 134, and 136, respectively.
  • the UE 102 is equipped with processing hardware 150 that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the PHY controller 152 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical DL channels and/or DL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C, and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the PHY controller 152 is also configured to transmit data and control signal on physical UL channels and/or UL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124 A, 124B, 124C, and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the processing hardware 150 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 154 configured to perform MAC functions with base station 104 or 106.
  • the MAC functions include a random access procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the base station 104 or 106.
  • the MAC functions include LTM related functions as described below.
  • the processing hardware 150 can further include an RRC controller 156 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
  • the UE 102 in DC can use a radio bearer (e g., a DRB or an SRB) that at different times terminates at the MN 104 or the SN 106.
  • the UE 102 can apply one or more security 7 keys when communicating on the radio bearer, in the uplink (UL) (from the UE 102 to a base station) and/or downlink (from a base station to the UE 102) direction.
  • Fig. IB depicts an example distributed implementation of a base station such as the base station 104 or 106.
  • the base station in this implementation can include a central unit (CU) 172 and one or more distributed units (DUs) 174.
  • CU central unit
  • DUs distributed units
  • the CU 172 is equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non- transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 130.
  • the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 140.
  • the processing hardware 140 in an example implementation includes an SN RRC controller 142 configured to manage or control one or more RRC configurations and/or RRC procedures when the base station 106 operates as an SN.
  • the DU 174 is also equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the processing hardware in an example implementation includes a medium access control (MAC) controller configured to manage or control one or more MAC operations or procedures (e.g., a random access procedure) and a radio link control (RLC) controller configured to manage or control one or more RLC operations or procedures when the base station 106 operates as an MN or an SN.
  • the process hardware may include further a physical layer controller configured to manage or control one or more physical layer operations or procedures.
  • FIG. 2 A illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 200 according to which the UE 102 can communicate with an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB (e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106).
  • an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106.
  • a physical layer (PHY) 202A of EUTRA provides transport channels to the EUTRA MAC sublayer 204A, which in turn provides logical channels to the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206 A.
  • the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A in turn provides RLC channels to an EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and, in some cases, to an NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the NR PHY 202B provides transport channels to the NR MAC sublayer 204B, which in turn provides logical channels to the NR RLC sublayer 206B.
  • the NR RLC sublayer 206B in turn provides data transfer services to the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the NR PDCP sublayer 210 in turn can provide data transfer services to Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) 212 or a radio resource control (RRC) sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A).
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the UE 102 in some implementations, supports both the EUTRA and the NR stack as shown in Fig. 2A, to support handover between EUTRA and NR base stations and/or to support DC over EUTRA and NR interfaces. Further, as illustrated in Fig. 2A, the UE 102 can support layering ofNR PDCP 210 over EUTRA RLC 206 A, and SDAP sublayer 212 over the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 receive packets (e.g., from an Internet Protocol (IP) layer, layered directly or indirectly over the PDCP layer 208 or 210) that can be referred to as service data units (SDUs), and output packets (e.g., to the RLC layer 206A or 206B) that can be referred to as protocol data units (PDUs). Except where the difference between SDUs and PDUs is relevant, this disclosure for simplicity refers to both SDUs and PDUs as “packets.”
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • PDUs protocol data units
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide signaling radio bearers (SRBs) or RRC sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A) to exchange RRC messages or non-access-stratum (NAS) messages, for example.
  • SRBs signaling radio bearers
  • RRC sublayer not shown in Fig. 2A
  • NAS non-access-stratum
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) to support data exchange.
  • Data exchanged on the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can be SDAP PDUs, Internet Protocol (IP) packets or Ethernet packets.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • Fig. 2B illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 250, which the UE 102 can communicate with a DU (e.g., DU 174) and a CU (e.g., CU 172).
  • the radio protocol stack 200 is functionally split as shown by the radio protocol stack 250 in Fig. 2B.
  • the CU at any of the base stations 104 or 106 can hold all the control and upper layer functionalities (e.g., RRC 214, SDAP 212, NR PDCP 210), while the lower layer operations (e.g., NR RLC 206B. NR MAC 204B, and NR PHY 202B) are delegated to the DU.
  • NR PDCP 210 provides SRBs to RRC 214
  • NR PDCP 210 provides DRBs to SDAP 212 and SRBs to RRC 214.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174 and the DU 174 operates the cell 124A.
  • the UE 102 initially communicates 302 with the DU 174 on the cell 124A using a serving DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174. e.g., using a serving CU configuration.
  • the DU 174 is a serving DU that is communicating with the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in carrier aggregation (CA) communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., cell 124D not shown in Fig.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the DU 174 operates the other cell(s).
  • the cell 124A and/or the other cell(s) are serving cell(s) for the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A only.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the cell 124A can be a PCell.
  • the other cell(s) include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or a SCell.
  • the cell 124A can be a SCell.
  • the base station 104 can be the DU 174, the CU 172 or the DU 174 and CU 172.
  • the UE 102 can transmit UL PDUs and/or UL control signals to the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the base station 104 via radio bearers which can include SRBs and/or DRB(s).
  • the base station 104 can configure the radio bearers to the UE 102.
  • UL control signals include UL control information, channel state information, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements (ACKs), HARQ negative ACKs, scheduling request(s) and/or sounding reference signal(s).
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • ACKs hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgements
  • HARQ negative ACKs scheduling request(s) and/or sounding reference signal(s).
  • the UE 102 can receive DL PDUs and/or DL control signals from the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the DL control signals include downlink control information (DCIs) and reference signals (e.g., synchronization signal block, channel state information reference signal(s) (CSI-RS(s)), and/or tracking reference signal(s)).
  • the base station 104 can transmit the DCIs on physical downlink control channel(s) (PDCCH(s)) monitored by the UE 102, on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • PDCCH(s) physical downlink control channel(s)
  • the serving DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters.
  • the serving DU configuration includes at least one first non-LTM TCI state configuration for the serving cell(s).
  • the DU 174 can transmit these configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 generates one or more messages (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) and transmits the one or more messages to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 directly.
  • the serving DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the serving DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the serving CU configuration includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters.
  • the serving CU configuration includes a MeasConfiig IE and/or a RadioBearerConftg IE defined in 3 GPP TS 38.331 or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConftg IE.
  • the serving DU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
  • the serving CU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for CSI measurement and reporting.
  • the UE 102 receives the serving CU configuration or the configuration parameters in the serving CU configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 receives a portion of the serving CU configuration and/or a portion of the serving DU configuration from a base station other than the base station 104 and the remaining portion of these configuration parameters from the base station 104.
  • the UE 102 and DU 174 communicates with each other using the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s), e.g., in the events 302, 318, 320, 324, 325, 330, and/or 331.
  • the DU 174 transmits at least one first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate some of the first non- LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 activates the some of the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) in response to the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s).
  • the DU 174 indicates deactivation of some of the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) in some of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s).
  • the UE 102 and DU 174 communicates with each other using the activated non-LTM TCI state configuration(s), e.g., in the events 302, 318, 320, 324, 325, 330, and/or 331.
  • each of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE.
  • the MAC CE(s) may include one or more TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CEs, one or more TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CEs, one or more PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced PUCCH Spatial Relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE- specific PDCCH MAC CEs, one or more PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation for multiple TRP PUCCH repetition MAC CEs, and/or one or more Unified TCI States Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs.
  • the DU 174 includes a serving cell ID (e.g., a serving cell index) in each of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • a serving cell ID e.g., a serving cell index
  • Each of the serving cell ID(s) indicates a respective serving cell of the serving cell(s).
  • the serving DU configuration includes the serving cell ID(s) and configures association(s) between the serving cell ID(s) and the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 While communicating with the base station 104, the UE 102 transmits 304 at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement report includes Layer 1 (LI) measurement report(s) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurement report(s) for at least one serving cell of the UE 102 and/or at least one non-serving cell.
  • the DU 174 transmits 306 a DU-to-CU message including the L3 measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the DU-to-CU message(s) of the event 306 is/are Fl application protocol (F1AP) message(s) (e.g., UL RRC Message Transfer message(s)).
  • Fl application protocol F1AP
  • the DU 174 does not transmit or refrains from transmitting the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
  • the at least one serving cell includes the cell 124A and/or other cell(s), and the at least one non-serving cell includes the cell 124B and/or cell 124C.
  • the serving DU configuration or the serving CU configuration includes at least one measurement configuration.
  • the UE 102 receives one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements and transmits 304 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)) and/or LI measurement configuration(s).
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) e.g., CSI-MeasConfig IE(s)
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) can configure reference signal(s) and/or resources of the reference signal(s) for the UE 102 to measure and obtain LI measurement results.
  • the reference signal(s) includes CSI-RS(s) and/or Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Block(s) (SSB(s)).
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) is/are CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s).
  • the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) configures way(s) the UE 102 uses to transmit LI measurement results/reports.
  • the LI measurement report configuration(s) is/are CSI-ReportConflg IE(s).
  • the UE 102 transmits the L3 measurement report(s) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 in accordance with the L3 measurement configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the LI measurement configuration(s) or LI measurement reporting configuration(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for a lower layer triggered mobility (LTM).
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for the LTM.
  • the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for the LTM.
  • each of the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) can include a trigger event configuration configuring a trigger event to trigger the UE 102 to transmit a LI measurement report. If the UE 102 detects the trigger event, the UE 102 transmits a LI measurement report to the DU 174.
  • each of the LI measurement report(s) can include at least one LI measurement result.
  • the at least LI measurement result includes at least one LI -reference signal received power (Ll-RSRP) value and/or at least one LI- Signal to Interference Noise Ratio (Ll-SINR) value.
  • Ll-RSRP LI -reference signal received power
  • Ll-SINR LI- Signal to Interference Noise Ratio
  • the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. That is, the UE 102 transmits the each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the DU 174. In yet other implementations, the UE 102 transmits a portion of the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) and the rest of the LI measurement report(s) on physical UL shared channel(s) (PUSCH(s)) to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
  • each of the L3 measurement report(s) can include at least one L3 measurement result.
  • the at least one L3 measurement result includes at least one RSRP (value) and/or at least one SINR (value).
  • the UE 102 transmits each of the L3 measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the CU 172 via the DU 174.
  • each of the L3 measurement report(s) can be a RRC message (e.g., MeasurementReport message).
  • each of the L3 measurement configuration(s) includes a particular measurement identity (e.g., measld) and each of the L3 measurement report(s) includes a particular measurement identity 7 in a particular L3 measurement configuration.
  • the CU 172 receives aL3 measurement report including a measurement identity- and a L3 measurement result from the UE 102 via the DU 174, the CU 172 can determine that the L3 measurement report is associated to a L3 measurement configuration identified by the measurement identity 7 .
  • the UE 102 transmits a MAC control element (CE) including the measurement report to the DU 174 in the event 304.
  • a MAC control element CE
  • the UE 102 generate one or more MAC PDUs each including one or more of the MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in the event 304.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals in accordance with the at least one measurement configuration.
  • the one or more reference signals can include one or more Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Blocks (SSBs) and/or one or more CSLRSs.
  • the UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements.
  • the DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., the cell 124B, the cell 124C and/or cell(s) not shown in Fig. 1 A).
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare a first cell (e.g., the cell 124B) for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell could be used by the base station 104 to communicate with the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell qualifies to be a candidate cell that could be used for communication with the UE 102. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A, and/or is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A by a first predetermined threshold, the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measure report is received from the UE 102 or not.
  • the CU 172 transmits 308 a first CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes a cell identity (ID) 1 of the first cell in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the cell ID 1 is cell global identity (CGI).
  • the cell ID is a portion of the CGI.
  • the cell ID is a physical cell ID (PCI).
  • the CU 172 includes a LTM indicator in the first CU-to-DU message to indicate the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM.
  • the LTM indicator is a LTM Information to be Setup IE or LTM Information to be Modified IE.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM indicator in LTM Information to be Setup IE and includes the LTM Information to be Setup IE in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM indicator in a LTM Information to be Modified IE and includes the LTM Information to be Modified IE in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 In response to the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 generates a first LTM DU configuration (referred to herein after as LTM DU configuration 1) for the UE 102, which configures the first cell for LTM.
  • the DU 174 transmits 310 a first DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration 1 to the CU 172 in response to the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 can include the cell ID 1 together with the LTM DU configuration 1 in an IE of the first DU-to-CU message to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is associated with the first cell (i.e., the cell ID 1).
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell, the DU 174 initiates transmission of the first DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 instead of in response to a CU-to-DU message received from the CU 172.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the cell ID of the first cell associated with the LTM DU configuration 1 to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell.
  • the CU 172 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell.
  • the CU 172 can include additional cell ID(s) (e.g., cell ID(s) 2, ... , N) in the first CU-to-DU message to prepare additional cell(s) (e.g., cell(s) 2, ...
  • the DU 174 includes additional LTM DU configuration(s) (e.g., LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N) each configuring a particular cell of the additional cell(s), as described below.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the additional cell ID(s) respectively associated with the additional LTM DU configuration(s) to indicate that which LTM DU configuration is associated to which cell (ID).
  • the cell(s) 1 and/or 2, .. . , N are candidate cell(s).
  • the CU 172 does not include a (reference) LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N (i.e., nonreference LTM DU configuration(s)) based on the reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to- DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, and/or 2, . ..
  • the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a first reference LTM DU configuration) in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a second reference LTM DU configuration) replacing the first reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2. ... , N based on the second reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the second reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and/or reporting.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving DU configuration and the rest of the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the rest of the serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as the serving DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 After receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., an RRCReconflguration message) including the LTM DU configuration 1 and transmits 316 a second CU-to-DU message including the RRC reconfiguration message to the DU 174.
  • a RRC reconfiguration message e.g., an RRCReconflguration message
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 does not include a/the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 if the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration to the UE 102 during the event 302, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, if the CU 172 receives the reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Otherwise, if the CU 172 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first container (e.g., a field/IE) and includes the first container (e.g., LTM configuration 1) in the RRC reconfiguration message ofthe events 316 and 318. In such cases, the CU 172 generates the first container.
  • the first container is to indicate the UE 102 not to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 immediately.
  • the UE 102 receives a RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 318) including a configuration (e.g.. the LTM DU configuration 1).
  • the UE 102 refrains from immediately applying the configuration. Otherwise, if the configuration is not included in the first container, the UE 102 can apply the configuration immediately.
  • the first container includes or is a first addition or modification list (e.g., Itm-CandidateToAddModList field or LTM-CandidateToAddModList IE).
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first element (referred to herein after as element 1) of the first addition or modification list.
  • the CU 172 generates an RRC message (e g., RRC Recconfiguration message) including the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1, and includes the RRC message in the element 1.
  • the element 1 is an addition or modification IE (e.g., LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE. LTM-Candidate IE, LTM- CandidateToAddMod IE or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE).
  • LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE e.g., LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE.
  • LTM-Candidate IE LTM- CandidateToAddMod IE
  • LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE
  • the DU 174 generates the first container and includes the first container in the first DU-to-CU message. In yet other alternative implementations, the DU 174 generates the element 1 and includes the element 1 in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU 172 includes a LTM CU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the first container or the element 1, where the LTM CU configuration 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 can include the LTM CU configuration 1 and the LTM DU configuration in the element 1.
  • the CU 172 includes LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the second container, where the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 can include the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configured on(s) in the element(s) 2, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes, in the element(s) 2. .... N, the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . . . . N. respectively.
  • the CU 172 does not include, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, LTM CU configuration(s) for some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . .. , N.
  • the DU 174 transmits 318 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 transmits 320 a RRC reconfiguration complete message (e.g., an RRCReconfigurationComplete message) to the DU 174, which in turn transmits 322 a second DU-to-CU message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 performs security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE 102 When the UE 102 receives the PDCP PDU from the CU 172 via the DU 174 (i.e., events 316 and 318), the UE 102 decrypts the encrypted RRC reconfiguration and encrypted MAC-I to obtain the RRC reconfiguration message and MAC-I and verifies whether the MAC-I is valid. If the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is invalid, the UE 102 discards or ignores the RRC reconfiguration message. In some implementations, the UE 102 can perform a RRC connection reestablishment procedure in response to the invalid MAC-I. Otherwise, if the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is valid, the UE 102 can process the RRC reconfiguration. The UE 102 refrains from applying (i.e., executing) the LTM DU configuration 1 until receiving a LTM command activating the LTM DU configuration 1 as described for events 330, 350.
  • the events 308 (optional) and 310 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM preparation procedure 390.
  • the events 316, 318, 320. 322 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM configuration delivery procedure 394.
  • the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Setup Request message
  • the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Setup Response message
  • the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message
  • the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the CU 172 can transmit a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the second CU-to-DU message is aDL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • the second CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message.
  • the second DU-to-CU message is a UL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • the second DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message.
  • the CU 172 can include a reference LTM CU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container.
  • the CU 172 might generate the LTM CU configuration 1 (i.e., non-reference LTM CU configuration) as a delta configuration to augment the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 might generate some or all of the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ...
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and does not include a non-reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and/or the reference LTM DU configuration in an additional container (e.g., reference LTM configuration) and include the additional container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving CU configuration and the rest of the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the rest of the serving CU configuration. In yet other implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as the serving LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, a first LTM ID (referred to herein after as ID 1) for identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1.
  • ID 1 a first LTM ID
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first container or element 1.
  • the CU 172 assigns the ID 1.
  • the CU 172 can transmit the ID 1 to the DU 174, and the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the cell ID 1.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 transmits 312 a third CU-to-DU message including the ID 1 to the DU 174 instead of including the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 in the third CU-to-DU message, can include the LTM DU configuration 1 and the ID 1 and indicate the association between the ID 1 and LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 can directly associate the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 in the third CU-to-DU message, can include the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 (i.e., the first LTM ID) and indicate the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1.
  • the DU 174 can associate the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1, based on the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 and the association between the cell ID 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 in the third CU-to-DU message, can include the LTM DU configuration 1, the cell ID 1 and/or the ID 1 and indicate the association between the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the cell ID 1.
  • the DU 174 can transmit 314 a third DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 in response to the third CU-to-DU message.
  • the third CU-to-DU message and third DU-to-CU message are UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID 1, the cell ID 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration 1 in the second CU-to-DU message as described above. Thus, the third CU-to-DU message can be omitted.
  • the third DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message. In such cases, the CU 172 transmits a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to the UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the events 312 (optional) and/or 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM ID assignment procedure 392.
  • the DU 174 can include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container or element 1. Alternatively, the DU 174 does not include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container and/or element 1.
  • the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 generates a fourth container (e.g.. a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the fourth container in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
  • the CU 172 includes the fourth container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 retrieves the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 from the fourth container and includes the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 as described above.
  • neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a plurality of configuration parameters for the UE 102 to communicate with the DU 174 on the first cell.
  • the plurality of configuration parameters include physical layer configuration parameters (e.g.. PhysicalCellGroupConflg IE).
  • MAC layer configuration parameters e.g., MAC-CellGroupConfig IE
  • RLC configuration parameters e.g., RLC- BearerConfig IE(s)
  • the plurality of configuration parameters include a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)).
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 is CellGroupConflg IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConflg IE.
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters.
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes aMeasConftg lE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConflg IE and/ or RadioBearerConfig IE.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes LI measurement configuration 1 (e.g., a CSI-MeasConfig IE) and/or at least one transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration.
  • LI measurement configuration 1 e.g., a CSI-MeasConfig IE
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes the LI measurement configuration and/or the TCI state configuration(s) 1.
  • the LI measurement configuration includes at least one reference signal (RS) resource configuration 1 and/or at least one report configuration 1.
  • the RS resource configuration(s) 1 configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell 1.
  • the RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s).
  • the RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI- RS resource(s).
  • each of the RS resource configuration(s) 1 includes a RS resource configuration ID.
  • the RS resource configuration(s) 1 is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s).
  • the report configuration(s) 1 configures one or more UL resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results.
  • each of the report configuration(s) 1 includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the RS resource configuration(s) 1.
  • each of the TCI state configuration(s) 1 configures a TCI state that associates one or two DL RSs with a corresponding quasicolocation (QCL) type. The DL RS(s) are associated with the cell 1.
  • QCL quasicolocation
  • the DU 174 includes the LI measurement configuration 1 and/or the TCI state configuration(s) 1 in a serving DU configuration 1 (e.g., non-LTM DU configuration).
  • the DU 174 includes the serving DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the DU 174 transmits an additional DU-to-CU message including the serving DU configuration to the CU 172.
  • the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the CU 172 includes the serving DU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the CU 172 transmits another RRC reconfiguration message including the serving DU configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the DU 174 includes a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the cell 124 A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1 .
  • the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the random access configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration, as described below. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the random access configuration or indicates the UE 102 to skip a random access procedure in LTM, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the random access configuration.
  • the DU 174 includes random access configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the reference LTM DU configuration regardless of whether the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized or not.
  • the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration parameters, as described below.
  • the random access configuration parameters configure physical random access channel (PRACH) resources, an association between SSB and PRACH resources, and/or one or more PRACH occasions.
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the DU 174 determines to include, in the LTM DU configuration 1, a first indication configuring the UE 102 not to perform a random access procedure on the first cell. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the first indication, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in accordance with or in response to the first indication. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the first indication, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in accordance with the random access configuration in the event 332, in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the first indication, as described below.
  • the DU 174 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a LTM cell switch information in the first LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the random access configuration (parameters) in the LTM cell switch information (e.g., Itm-CellSwitchlnfo field or LTM-CellSwitchlnfo IE).
  • the LTM cell switch information e.g., Itm-CellSwitchlnfo field or LTM-CellSwitchlnfo IE.
  • the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124 A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 as described below, in response to or in accordance with the reconfiguration with sync configuration. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332.
  • the DU 174 includes a cell ID (i.e., cell ID 1) of cell 1 (i.e., the first cell) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the cell ID 1 can be a PCI.
  • the cell ID 1 is a CGI.
  • the cell ID 1 included in the LTM DU configuration 1 is a PCI, while the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message is a CGI.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 or the first cell.
  • the cell index 1 is not a cell ID.
  • the cell index takes fewer bits than the cell ID.
  • the CU 172 sets the cell index 1 to a value and includes the cell index 1 in the first CU-to-DU message of the event 308.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare additional cell(s) (i.e.. cell(s) 2. .... N) of the base station 104 for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the additional cell(s) could be used by the base station 104 to communicate with the UE 102.
  • the additional cell(s) can include the cell 124C and/or cell(s) other than the cells 124A, 124B and 124C.
  • the CU 172 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cells can be different from the first predetermined threshold. In another implementation, the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cell(s) can be the same as the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the respective predetermined thresholds for the additional cells can be the same or different. Alternatively, the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measurement report is received from the UE 102 or not.
  • the CU 172 determines to prepare the additional cell(s)
  • the CU 172 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure (LTM preparation procedure(s)) with the DU 174 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the additional cell(s)
  • the DU 174 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure (LTM preparation procedure(s)) with the CU 172 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
  • the CU 172 and DU 174 perform LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . .. , N to prepare the cell(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, similar to the procedure 390.
  • the CU 172 can include the cell ID(s) 2, ... , N in CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, similar to the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 In the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .... N, the DU 174 generates LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . .. , N configuring the cell(s) 2, .. .
  • the CU 172 and DU 174 performs a single LTM preparation procedure (i. e. , the LTM preparation procedure 390) to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2. . .. , N.
  • the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , 2, .. . , N for the cell(s)
  • the DU 174 can include the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ... . N respectively associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. 2, ... , N to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ... , N are configured for the cell ID(s) 1, 2, . . . , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 determines to perform the LTM preparation procedure 390, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, . . . , N in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively, for LTM.
  • the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N in element(s)
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • LTM ID(s) i.e., ID(s) 2, ... , N
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, N in the first container.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, .... N and LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the element(s) 2, . .. , N in the first addition or modification list.
  • the CU 172 assigns the ID(s) 2, ... , N for the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives the ID(s) 2, ... , N from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 receives from the DU 174 the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, .. . , N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 can perform a LTM ID assignment procedure with the DU 174 for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, similar to the procedure 392.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicate the association between the ID(s) 2, . . . , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively.
  • the DU 174 can associate the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N with the ID(s) 2, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 can include the cell ID(s) 2. . . . . N and the ID(s) 2, . .. , N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicate the association between the cell ID(s) 2, . . . , N and the ID(s) 2, ... , N, respectively.
  • the DU 174 can associate the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N with the ID(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, based on the association between the cell ID(s) 2, .. . , N and the ID(s) 2, .. . , N and the association between the cell ID(s) 2, . ..
  • the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, . . . , N, the cell ID(s) 2, .. . , N and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the second CU-to-DU message as described above.
  • the third CU-to-DU message can be omitted.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, . .. , N in the first CU-to-DU message and indicate the ID(s) 2, ... , N is/are respectively associated with the cell ID(s) 2, ... , N.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . .. , N.
  • the CU 172 does not include the ID(s) 2, . . . , N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element(s) 2, . . . , N.
  • the DU 174 assigns the ID(s) 2, . .. , N.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, .. . , N in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, . .. , N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . . . ,N.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ...
  • the CU 172 does not include an ID (e.g., LTM ID) identifying each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element 1.
  • ID e.g., LTM ID
  • the CU 172 can generate a second container including the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N or element(s) 2, . . . , N instead of using the first container.
  • the CU 172 then transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration message including the second container to the UE 102 via the DU 174. similar to the events 316 and 318.
  • the UE 102 transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the events 320 and 322.
  • the second container can be a second addition or modification list (e.g., Itm- ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm- CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM-CandidateConflgToAddModList IE), and each of the element(s) 2, ... , N can be an addition or modification IE (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddMod IE).
  • the UE 102 can store the second addition or modification list together with the first addition or modification list, e.g., in a variable in its random access memory (RAM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • the DU 174 includes cell ID(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N to identify the cell(s) 2, ... , N, respectively.
  • each of the cell ID(s) 2, . . . , N is a PCI.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . . . . N includes cell index(es) 2 . . . . N indexing the cell ID(s) 2. .... N or the cell(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, . . .
  • the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 2, ... , N to different value(s) and include the cell index(es) 2, . . . , N in the first CU-to CU-to-DU message of the event 308.
  • the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 2, . . . , N to different values and include the cell index(es) 2, ... , N in CU-to-DU message(s) of the additional LTM preparation procedure(s).
  • the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ...
  • the cell ID(s) 1, . . . , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . .. , N are different from the cell ID(s) 1, .... N in the CU-to-DU message(s) described above.
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N includes physical configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, RLC configuration parameters and/or LI measurement configuration(s).
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N can be a CellGroupConfig IE as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. . , N include configuration parameters included in a CellGroupConfig IE as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the plurality of configuration parameters in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) include a particular special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)).
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N are CellGroupConfig IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , . . . , N include configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the CU 172 can include one or more additional LTM CU configurations in at least one of the element(s) 2, ... , N, the first container or the second container.
  • Each of the additional LTM CU configurations are associated with a particular LTM DU configuration of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N. Examples and implementations of the additional LTM CU configurations are similar to the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 determines to release the LTM DU configuration M of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . .. , N (or the element M of the element(s) 1, ... , M). 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N.
  • the CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the DU 174 to indicate the UE 102 to release the LTM DU configuration M or element M.
  • the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M for releasing the LTM DU configuration M or element M and includes the release list in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration M or element M and transmits a RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to indicate the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M.
  • the CU 172 can include the cell ID M or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 releases the LTM DU configuration M and transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172.
  • the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the DU 174 determines to release the LTM DU configuration K. In response to the determination, the DU 174 transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 to release the LTM DU configuration K. To indicate the LTM DU configuration K is released, the DU 174 can include the cell ID K or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the DU-to-CU message. 1 ⁇ K ⁇ N.
  • a release indication e.g., a field or IE
  • the CU 172 After (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K to release the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the release list to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits a RRC reconfiguration complete message to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 can transmit a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 in response to the DU-to-CU message.
  • the DU-to-CU message and CU-to-DU message are a UE Context Modification Required message and a UE Context Modification Confirm message, respectively.
  • the UE 102 After receiving the RRC reconfiguration in the event 318 or transmitting the RRC reconfiguration complete message in the event 320, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304.
  • the DU 174 may transmit 326 a DU-to-CU message including the at least one measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306.
  • the DU 174 does not transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the at least one measurement report of the event 324 include LI measurement report(s) or L3 measurement repot(s), as described for the event 304.
  • the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report on PUCCH(s) and/or PUSCH(s) to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In other implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one MAC CE including the at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174 in accordance with at least one measurement configuration.
  • the at least one measurement configuration configures the UE 102 to perform measurements and report measurement results.
  • the CU 172 transmits the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 can transmit one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the event 302 and/or 316 and/or after the event 306 or 316.
  • the one or more RRC messages may or may not include the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more reference signals can include one or more SSBs and/or one or more CSI-RSs.
  • the UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements and includes the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result in the at least measurement report of the event 324.
  • the DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A, the cell 1 and/or the cell(s) 2, N.
  • the one or more reference signals can be CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s).
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)), as described for the event 304.
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes or is LI measurement configuration(s), as described above.
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) can be CSI-MeasConfig IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331.
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) can include RS resource configuration(s) and/or report configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 transmits 324 the LI measurement report(s) on UL resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) to the DU 174 in accordance with the report configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 receives the LI measurement report(s) on the UL resources in accordance with the report configuration(s).
  • the report configuration(s) are or are similar to CSI-ReportConflg IE(s).
  • each of the report configuration(s) is a new RRC IE.
  • (each of) the report configuration(s) configures periodically reporting and/or event-triggered reporting of the LI measurement result(s).
  • the LI measurement report(s) is/are CSI report(s). In other implementations, the LI measurement report(s) is/are MAC CE(s). In some implementations, each of the measurement report(s) includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values. The UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the RS resource configuration(s) and/or the report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)).
  • the quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes new-type measurement configuration(s) (e.g., LTM measurement configuration(s)).
  • the new- type measurement configuration can be newly defined in a 3GPP specification.
  • the new-type measurement configuration(s) includes reference signal resource configuration(s) configuring resources where the DU 174 transmits reference signal(s).
  • the reference signal resource configuration(s) include CSI-RS(s) and/or SSB(s).
  • the reference signal resource configuration(s) is/are CSI- ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the new-type measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s), as described above.
  • the UE 102 transmits the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 receives the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s).
  • the measurement report(s) can be LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s) (e.g., LTM measurement report(s)).
  • the new- type measurement configuration includes configuration parameters newly defined in a 3GPP specification.
  • the DU 174 After (e.g., in response to) receiving the measurement report(s) in the event 324, the DU 174 generates a first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 (i.e., the first LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 or to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1). The DU 174 then transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124A to the UE 102. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124D to the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 can include the ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 , and the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the ID 1.
  • the DU 174 can include the cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 in the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, based on the cell index 1.
  • the UE 102 retrieves the cell index 1 from the LTM DU configuration 1 or element
  • the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 to obtain the cell index 1. before receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the cell index 1 and the association 1.
  • the UE 102 retrieves the cell index(es)
  • the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, .. . , N to obtain the cell index(es) 2, .. . , N, before receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 includes cell ID 1 in the first LTM command, where the cell ID 1 identifies the cell 1 .
  • the cell ID 1 included in the first LTM command is the same as the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 determines the cell ID 1 (e.g., PCI) included in the first LTM command from the cell ID 1 (e.g., CGI) received in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, based on the cell ID 1.
  • the DU 174 has a mapping table to store mappings between the PCI(s) 1. . .. , N and the CGI(s) 1 , . . . , N for the cell(s) 1 , .. . , N, respectively.
  • the DU 174 can include a bit map in the first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1, instead of the ID 1 or cell index 1.
  • the number of bits in the bit map is larger than or equal to L ‘N”.
  • bit 1, ... , N corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, . . . , N, the ID(s) 1, . . . , N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N or the element(s) 1, . . .
  • bit 1 a corresponding bit in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1.
  • bit 1 the bit index 1, the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit I set to the first value in the bit map.
  • bit 0, ... , N-l corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ... , N, the ID(s) 1, ... , N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N or the element (s) 1, ...
  • the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 0) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1 the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1.
  • the UE 102 can determine the cell index 1, the ID 1 LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the bit 0 set to the first value in the bit map.
  • the DU 174 sets the remaining bits in the bit map to a second value to indicate that the rest of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, , N is/are not activated.
  • the first value is one and the second value is zero. In other implementations, the first value is zero and the second value is one.
  • the DU 174 can set the corresponding bit (e.g., bit L or bit L-l) in the bit map to the first value and set the remaining bits to the second value, where 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N. In some implementations, the DU 174 sets at most one bit in the bit map to the first value.
  • the UE 102 After determining or identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, the UE 102 then applies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM CU configuration, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s)) of the event 324 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell.
  • the reference signal(s) can be CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s).
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, based on the at least one measurement result. In some implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 because, when or if the at least one measurement result is above a second predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement result includes Ll -RSRP value(s), Ll-RSRQ value(s) and/or Ll -SINR value(s). In other implementations, the at least one measurement result includes RSRP value(s), RSRQ value(s) and/or SINR value(s) for the new-type measurement report(s).
  • the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In one implementation, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In this case, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold. This indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to that signal strength or qualify of the first cell is above the second predetermined threshold for the UE 102.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) of the events 324 and 326 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, because the at least one measurement result indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above a second predetermined threshold.
  • the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In one implementation, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold. This also indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. Thus, the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above the second predetermined threshold.
  • the CU 172 transmits 328 a fourth CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a serving cell change to the cell 1 for the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102 and optionally transmits a fourth DU-to-CU message to the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 can determine to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell index 1.
  • the CU 172 can include the cell ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell ID 1.
  • the CU 172 can include the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 can determine to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1.
  • the fourth CU-to-DU message and fourth DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 or the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 329 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a fast serving cell change (i.e., a LTM serving cell change).
  • the DU can transmit the DU-to-CU message 329 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 330.
  • the first LTM command is a MAC CE included in a MAC PDU that the UE 102 receives from the DU 174 in the event 330.
  • the MAC CE can be a new MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321.
  • the DU 174 includes a subheader identifying the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU and the UE 102 identifies the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU in accordance with the subheader.
  • the subheader can include a logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID defined in a 3GPP specification to identify the new MAC CE. For example, the logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID are newly defined in 3GPP TS 38.321.
  • the first LTM command is a DCI that the UE 102 receives on a PDCCH from the DU 174 in the event 330.
  • the DU 174 generates a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the DCI, scrambles the CRC with a first C- RNTI of the UE 102, and transmits the DCI and scrambled CRC on the PDCCH in the event 330.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • a format of the DCI can be an existing DCI format defined in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.212).
  • the format of the DCI can be a new DCI format defined in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.212).
  • the DU 174 does not perform security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the first LTM command. This speeds up processing the first LTM command in the UE 102 because the UE 102 does not perform security check (e.g., decry ption and/or integrity check) on the first LTM command.
  • security protection e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption
  • the UE 102 may transmit 331 an acknowledgement to the DU 174 on the cell 124 A or cell 124D to indicate that the UE 102 receives the first LTM command.
  • the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK.
  • the acknowledgement is a MAC CE.
  • the MAC CE is an existing MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321.
  • the MAC CE is a new MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321.
  • the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission.
  • the CU 172 transmits 316 the RRC reconfiguration message in response to the L3 measurement report 306 for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 can transmit a first RRC reconfiguration message including the L3 measurement configuration (e.g., aMeasConfig IE) to the UE 102 before the event 306.
  • the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command in response to the LI measurement report(s) 324 for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 can transmit a second RRC reconfiguration message including the LI or new-type measurement configuration(s) to the UE 102.
  • the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages can be the same message (i.e., the same instance).
  • the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are different messages.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration message is the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration message is different from the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
  • the UE 102 accesses 332 the first cell.
  • the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1, the cell ID 1 or the cell index 1 received in the first LTM command and applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the DU 174 on the first cell.
  • the UE 102 disconnects from the cell 124A, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or after transmitting 331 the acknowledgement.
  • the UE 102 stops communicating on the cell 124A after (e g., in response to) receiving 330 the first LTM command or transmitting 331 the acknowledgement.
  • the UE 102 accesses the first cell by performing a random access procedure on the first cell with the DU 174, in response to receiving the first LTM command. In other implementations, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and transmits the first transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to the DU 174, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command.
  • the first transmission e.g., a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission
  • the DU 174 configures the access of the UE 102 to the first cell, including whether or not the UE 102 performs a random access procedure, in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 determines whether to perform a random access procedure on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure, the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell in the event 332, in order to connect to the first cell.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconflgurationWithSync IE) to configure that the UE 102 performs a random access procedure when the UE 102 receives a LTM command for the first cell.
  • the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to skip the random access procedure for a LTM serving cell change to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 after receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 skips the random access procedure and transmits the first transmission (e.g.. a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to the DU 174 in the event 332.
  • the DU 174 excludes a reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1 to configure the UE 102 skipping a random access procedure for a LTM serving cell change to the first cell.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the reconfiguration with sync configuration or the random access configuration.
  • the DU 174 configures whether the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell in a LTM command.
  • the UE 102 determines whether to perform the random access procedure on the first cell in the event 332 in accordance with the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the first LTM command, an indication (e.g., a field) indicating skipping a random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 In response to the indication or the first LTM command including the indication, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and directly transmits the first transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to access the first cell.
  • the DU 174 excludes the indication in the first LTM command to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell to access the first cell.
  • the DU 174 includes a timing advance value in the first LTM command to indicate skipping a random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 In response to receiving the timing advance value or the first LTM command including the timing advance value, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and transmits the first transmission on the first cell to access the first cell, using the timing advance value.
  • the DU 174 excludes, in the first LTM command, a timing advance value to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell to access the first cell.
  • the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure. In some implementations, the random access procedure is a contention-free random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a contentionbased random access procedure. In cases where the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits a Message 3 including a UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure. The DU 174 transmits a contention resolution message (e.g., a Message 4) to the UE 102 in response to the Message 3.
  • a contention resolution message e.g., a Message 4
  • the UE 102 transmits a Message A including the UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure.
  • the DU 174 transmits a contention resolution message (e g., Message B) to the UE 102 in response to the Message A.
  • the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure (i.e., the UE 102 successfully accesses the first cell).
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a second C-RNTI and the UE identity is the second C-RNTI of the UE 102.
  • the contention resolution message is aPDCCH transmission addressed to the second C-RNTI.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include a C-RNTL the UE identity is the first C-RNTI.
  • the contention resolution message is a PDCCH transmission addressed to the first C-RNTI.
  • the DU 174 includes the second C-RNTI in the reconfiguration with sync configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the second C-RNTI in the LTM cell switch information.
  • the random access procedure is a contention free random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 transmits the dedicated random access preamble to the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure (i.e., the UE 102 successfully accesses the first cell).
  • the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure on the first cell as described above, the DU 174 will detect that the UE 102 has accessed the first cell when the DU 174 receives Message 3, Message A, or the dedicated preamble in the random access procedure. If the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to skip a random access procedure, the DU 174 will detect that the UE 102 has accessed the first cell when the DU 174 receives the first transmission. [0123] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits the first transmission (e.g., the PUSCH transmission) on the first cell using a UL grant. In some implementations, the first LTM command includes the UL grant.
  • the first transmission e.g., the PUSCH transmission
  • the first LTM command includes the UL grant.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 performs a LTM serving cell change to the first cell in response to the first LTM command, the UE 102 receives a first DCI including the UL grant on a PDCCH on the first cell. In some implementations, the UE 102 attempts to receive the first DCI or the UL grant by monitoring one or more PDCCHs on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1, when the UE 102 switches to the first cell in response to the first LTM command. While monitoring one or more PDCCHs on the first cell, the UE 102 receives the first DCI and a CRC of the first DCI on the PDCCH.
  • the UE 102 determines that the first DCI was sent for the UE 102. using the CRC and the second C-RNTI. In the case that the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the second C- RNT, the UE 102 determines that the first DCI was sent for the UE 102, using the CRC and the first C-RNTI.
  • the CU 172 transmits at least one first TCI state configuration (e.g., LTM TCI state configuration) for the first cell to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • each of the first TCI state configuration(s) configures a TCI state for the UE 102 to transmit and/or receive data and/or control signal on the first cell.
  • Each TCI state associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type and the DL RS(s) might be associated with a particular cell of the cell(s) 1, ⁇ N.
  • the DL RS(s) include SSB(s) and/or tracking reference signal(s) (TRS(s)).
  • the CU 172 receives a DU-to-CU message including the first TCI state configuration(s) from the DU 174 and transmits a RRC message including the first TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the DU 174 includes the first TCI state configuration(s) in a serving DU configuration (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message.
  • the DU-to-CU message is the DU-to-CU message 310 or the DU-to-CU message 314.
  • the DU-to-CU message is a message different from the messages 310, 314.
  • the DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or a UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 in a first interface protocol lE/field in the DU-to-CU message 310, and includes the serving DU configuration in a second interface protocol lE/field in the DU-to-CU message 314.
  • the events 312 (optional) and/or 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM TCI state configuration procedure 392.
  • the CU 172 includes the serving DU configuration in the RRC message. In some implementations, the CU 172 refrains from including the serving DU configuration in a container for LTM (e g., the first container). In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM ID 1 and the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in an element for LTM, an addition or modification list for LTM, or a container, and the CU 172 includes the element, addition or modification list for LTM, or the container in the RRC message, similar to the element 1, the first addition or modification list, or the first container respectively. In some implementations, the RRC message is the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the CU 172 may include the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the element 1.
  • the RRC reconfiguration is another RRC reconfiguration message (not shown in Fig. 3).
  • the DU 174 also includes the first TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 refrains from including the first TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the first interface protocol lE/field is a first Fl AP lE/field and the second interface protocol lE/field is a second Fl AP lE/field.
  • one of the first F1AP lE/field and the second F1AP lE/field is a F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field and the other is not the F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field.
  • the DU 174 includes the first F 1 AP lE/field in a DU to CU RRC Information IE in the message 314 and includes the second F1AP lE/field in the DU to CU RRC Information IE in the DU- to-CU message.
  • neither the first Fl AP lE/field nor the second Fl AP IE is a F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field.
  • the second F1AP lE/field is the DU to CU RRC Information IE and the first F1AP lE/field is a new IE specific for including a LTM DU configuration.
  • the DU 174 transmits 325 at least one first LTM TCI states Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate some of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 activates the some of the first LTM TCI state configuration! s) in response to the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s).
  • the DU 174 indicates deactivation of some of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in some of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s).
  • the DU 174 transmits one or more DL RSs on the candidate cell(s) using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s) or the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the DL RS(s) may include one or more SSBs and/or one or more TRSs.
  • the UE 102 receives the DL RS(s) using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 may obtain LI measurement results from the received DL RS(s) and transmits the LI measurement results to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 may obtain L3 measurement results from the received DL RS(s) and transmits the L3 measurement results to the CU 172 via the DU 174.
  • the DU 174 refrains from using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to communicate with the UE 102 on the serving cell(s). In some implementations, the UE 102 refrains from using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to communicate with the DU 174 on the serving cell(s).
  • each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE (e.g., Candidate Cell TCI States Activation/Deactivation command).
  • the DU 174 includes the LTM ID 1 in each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 includes a candidate cell index (e.g., the cell index 1) in each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In such cases, the candidate cell index is different from the LTM ID 1.
  • each of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) may include the candidate cell index.
  • the CU 172 includes the candidate cell index in the RRC message including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 includes the candidate cell index in the element 1.
  • the UE 102 and the DU 174 determines the candidate cell index from the PCI of the first cell. In such cases, the base station 104 does not transmit the candidate cell index to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or accessing 332 the first cell, the UE 102 performs DL reception (e.g., monitors one or more PDCCHs) or UL transmission on the first cell using some or all of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the event 336. In other implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or accessing 332 the first cell, the UE 102 performs DL reception (e.g.. monitors one or more PDCCHs) or UL transmission on the first cell without using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the event 336.
  • DL reception e.g., monitors one or more PDCCHs
  • UL transmission on the first cell without using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the event 336.
  • each of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes a TCI state ID identifying the corresponding TCI state configuration.
  • the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ..., L, where L is a positive integer larger than zero.
  • the LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ... , L include TCI state ID(s) 1, ... , L identifying the LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ... , L, respectively.
  • the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to activate the LTM TCI state configuration 1 to communicate on the first cell.
  • the UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration 1 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 accesses 332 on the first cell using the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 accesses 332 on the first cell without using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 on the first cell using the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1.
  • the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs, receives one or more DL RSs. receives one or more PDSCH transmissions, and/or transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 detects 332 that the UE 102 accesses the first cell and/or communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, based on the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 receives 332 the first transmission and/or 336 the additional transmission(s) from the UE 102 on the first cell, based on the TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 transmits one or more PDCCHs, one or more PDSCH transmissions, and/or one or more DL RSs, based on the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to activate the TCI state configuration 2 to communicate on the first cell, in addition to the TCI state ID 1.
  • the UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration 1 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command, and activates the LTM TCI state configuration 2 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 accesses 332 and/or communicates 336 on the first cell using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1 and 2.
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336, using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1 and 2.
  • the UE 102 after applying one or more TCI state configurations (e.g., the TCI state configuration(s) 1 and/or 2) indicated in a LTM command (e.g., the first LTM command), the UE 102 takes time (e.g., beam application time or cell switch delay) to acquire TCI state(s) configured in the TCI state configuration(s) (e.g., synchronize and/or receive DL RS(s) configured in the TCI state configuration(s)).
  • the time to acquire TCI state(s) is considered as a switch delay.
  • the DU 174 takes the switch delay into account when communicating with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336.
  • the DU 174 starts to communicate with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336 after the switch delay, using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1 and/or 2.
  • the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs. receives one or more DL RSs. and/or receives one or more PDSCH transmissions from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions on the first cell to the DU 174 using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals one or more PDCCHs.
  • Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI.
  • the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and receives one or more PDSCH transmissions from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI.
  • the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals on one or more PDCCHs on the first cell to the UE 102 using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and transmits one or more PDSCH transmissions to the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • the UE 102 transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions to the DU 174 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 may transmit the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions to the DU 174 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • the DU 174 receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs on the first cell using the TCI state configuration 1 and the TCI state configuration 2, and transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions on the first cell using one of the TCI state configuration 1 and the TCI state configuration 2.
  • the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals on one or more PDCCHs receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
  • Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI.
  • the CU 172 receives a CN-to-BS message including a UE capability IE of the UE 102 from a CN (e.g.. the CN 110 or the AMF 164), e.g.. during the event 302.
  • the CN-to-BS message is aNG application protocol (NGAP) message.
  • the CU 172 receives a BS-to-BS message including the UE capability IE from another base station (e.g., the base station 106), e.g., before the event 302.
  • the CU 172 receives a UE Capability Information message including the UE capability IE from the UE 102, via the DU 174 or another DU e.g., during the event 302.
  • the DU 174 receives the UE capability IE (e.g., UE- NR-Capability or UE-6G-Capability) of the UE 102 from the CU 172, e.g., during the event 302.
  • the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 supports RACH-less LTM.
  • the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above.
  • the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU- to-CU message(s) described above.
  • the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the UE capability’ IE indicates that the UE supports early timing advance (TA) acquisition. Based on the indication of supporting early TA acquisition, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/ or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • TA timing advance
  • the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the UE capability IE indicates that the UE supports LTM TCI states. Based on the indication of supporting LTM TCI states, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support LTM TCI states, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the DU 174 does not determine whether to provide a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 provides the LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the UE 102 to the CU 172 as described above.
  • the CU 172 determines whether to transmit the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above.
  • the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. [0144] In other implementations, based on the indication of supporting the early TA acquisition, the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above.
  • the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the UE-based TA acquisition, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support LTM TCI states, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the DU 174 may not activate or may determine to not activate a (LTM) TCI state configuration in the first LTM command. In such cases, the DU 174 does not include a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Thus, when the UE 102 receives the first LTM command not including a TCI state configuration, the UE 102 refrains from using the first LTM TCI configuration(s) to access and/or communicate on the first cell. [0148] In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the RACH-less LTM, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 includes the one or more TCI state IDs (e.g., the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2) in the first LTM command as described above.
  • the DU 174 does not configure LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell for the UE 102, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 configures one or more LTM TCI state configurations (e.g., the first LTM TCI state configuration(s))
  • the DU 174 includes one or more LTM TCI state IDs (e.g., the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2) in the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability indicates that the UE 102 supports the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command as described above.
  • the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability indicates that the UE 102 supports LTM TCI states, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command as described above.
  • the UE 102 stops using or deactivates the first non-LTM TCI configuration(s) upon receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 After successfully accessing the first cell, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1. In some scenarios or implementations, the UE 102 communicates 336 PUSCH transmissions, PDSCH transmissions, PUCCH transmissions. PDCCH transmissions, and/or sounding reference signal (SRS) transmissions with the DU 174 on the first cell.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 with and the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the UE 102 In the case that the UE 102 receives neither the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a/the reference LTM CU configuration, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 neither transmits the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a/the reference CU configuration to the UE 102. the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and (at least a portion of) the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and (at least a portion of) the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 In the case that the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and does not receive the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 instead of the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration.
  • the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a full configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit a/the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes a first indication (e g., afield or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration.
  • the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a/the reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit a/the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment to the serving CU configuration, by excluding the first indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, by excluding the second indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the UE 102 In the case that the UE 102 receives the reference LTM CU configuration and does not receive the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration instead of the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 and CU 172 determine that the reference LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration as specified in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration.
  • the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment to the serving CU configuration, by excluding the first indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, by excluding the second indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the UE 102 In the case that the UE 102 neither receives the reference LTM CU configuration and nor the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. [0160] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes or configures at least one second non- LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 may transmit a second non- LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command on the first cell to the UE 102 to activate the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) and/or deactivate the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 includes a serving cell index for the first cell in the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command.
  • the DU 174 includes the serving cell index in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 stops using or deactivates the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration(s) in response to receiving the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command.
  • the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE.
  • the MAC CE may be a TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CE, a TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CEs, a PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, an Enhanced TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE- specific PDSCH MAC CE, an Enhanced PUCCH Spatial Relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, an Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE, an PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation for multiple TRP PUCCH repetition MAC CE, or an Unified TCI States Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.
  • the second non-LTM state configuration(s) may be Rel- 15/16 TCI state configuration(s) (i.e., not a unified joint/DL/UL TCI state). This imply that the BS 104 may configure Rel-15/16 beam indication framework for the first cell.
  • Non- LTM TCI state configurations activated/indicated by the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) may be only applicable to a channel or RS (PDSCH/PDCCH/CSI-RS/PUCCH/SRS).
  • the UE 102 if the UE 102 receives a second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the UE would stop or use the first LTM TCI state for channels or RSs, which are applicable to share/follow/apply unified TCI states. For example, if the UE 102 receives an Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE- specific PDCCH MAC CE, the UE 102 would stop or use the first LTM TCI state for at least one of other channels or RSs applicable to share/follow/apply unified TCI states as well (e.g., PDSCH, PUSCH, PUCCH, CSI-RS or SRS). If the UE 102 receives a second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the UE 102 may deactivate the activated first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes at least one TCI state configured in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In other implementations, TCI state(s) in the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) is/are different from the TCI(s) in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In some implementations, the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) configure more TCI states than the first LTM TCI state configurations(s). In some other implementations, TCI state(s) in the second non- LTM TCI state configuration(s) is/are identical with the TCI(s) in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the BS 104/CU 172/DU 174 may notify the UE 102 in a RRC message or signal, whether first LTM TCI state configuration(s) is identical or different or a subset of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s).
  • the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell is a subset of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell.
  • TCI state IDs of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell are not overlapped or identical with those of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell.
  • TCI state IDs of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell ranges from #000 to #007; TCI state IDs of the second non- LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell ranges from #008 to #015.
  • the UE 102 activates the first LTM TCI state configuration identified by TCI state ID #001; if the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command indicates TCI state ID #012. the UE 102 activates the second non-LTM TCI state configuration identified by TCI state ID #012.
  • the UE 102 combines or catenate the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell and the second non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell for non-LTM TCI state activation/indicate purpose.
  • the UE 102 considers or determines the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell as the non- LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell.
  • the DU 174 may not include or configure the at least one second non-LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 considers or determines the at least one first TCI state configuration(s) (e.g., LTM TCI state configuration) for the first cell as the non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 receives the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s), the UE 102 considers/determines that the TCI state ID(s) indicated in the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) refer to the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell. For example, if the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command indicates TCI state ID #000, the UE 102 activates and/or applies the first TCI state configuration (e.g.. LTM TCI state configuration) identified by TCI state ID #000, and performs non-LTM communication in the first cell.
  • the first TCI state configuration e.g.. LTM TCI state configuration
  • a first LTM TCI state configuration associates or includes a SSB corresponding to QCL type A
  • the UE 102 refrains from using such TCI state configuration for non-LTM purpose or communication in the first cell.
  • the UE 102 may consider or determine a first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell as a non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell, unless it includes or associates a SSB corresponding to QCL type A.
  • the DU 174 when or while the DU 174 communicates 332, 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, the DU 174 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate a LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell or associated with the LTM ID 1. In other implementations, when or while the DU 174 communicates 332. 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, the DU 174 transmits a second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate at least one LTM TCI state configuration in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) that is/are not activated by the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration(s) indicated in the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command.
  • the DU 174 may deactivate the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated in the first LTM command, in some implementations. In such cases, the UE 102 deactivate the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated in the first LTM command, in response.
  • the UE 102 and the DU 174 communicate with each other on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated by the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, as described above.
  • the UE 102 transmits a RRC message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell to indicate that the UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • a RRC message e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message
  • the UE 102 can include the RRC message in the Message 3 or Message A.
  • the UE 102 transmits the RRC message after completing the random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 includes the RRC message in a PUSCH transmission of the at least one PUSCH transmission.
  • the UE 102 can transmit the RRC message to the base station 104 via the cell 124A.
  • the DU 174 receives the RRC message, the DU 174 transmits the RRC message to the CU 172.
  • the UE 102 refrains from transmitting the RRC message to the base station 104 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 can include or transmit data in the Message 3, Message A or PUSCH transmission as described above.
  • the UE 102 can generate a MAC PDU and/or a RLC PDU including the data and transmits or includes the MAC PDU and/or RLC PDU in the PUSCH transmission.
  • the data can be a PDCP PDU, a SDAP PDU, a LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) PDU, a RRC PDU, and/or a NAS PDU.
  • LPP LTE Positioning Protocol
  • the RRC PDU includes a UL-DCCH-Message excluding a RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  • the NAS PDU includes a Mobility Management (MM) message or a Session Management (SM) message.
  • the MM message can be a 5G MM message or a 6G MM message
  • the SM message can be a 5G SM message or a 6G SM message.
  • the DU 174 can transmit 334 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., Access Success message) to the CU 172 (e.g., a CP of the CU 172).
  • the DU 174 can include the cell ID 1 of the first cell in the DU-to-CU message of the event 334.
  • the cell ID can be a PCI or a CGI.
  • the CU 172 determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the DU-to-CU message of the event 334.
  • the DU 174 can transmit a DL Data Delivery Status message or frame to the CU 172 (e.g., a UP of the CU 172).
  • the CU 172 might stop or suspend transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174 until receiving the DU-to-CU message 334.
  • the CU 172 might do so because the DU 174 cannot buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332.
  • the CU 172 continues or resumes transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 might continue transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 might do so because the DU 174 can buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332.
  • the DU 174 transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
  • the DU 174 when determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell, transmitting 330 the first LTM command, or receiving 331 the acknowledgement, the DU 174 can stop communicating with the UE 102 on the cell 124A and/or release resources of the cell 124A configured for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 can generate some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s) to replace the serving DU configuration. If the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 instead of the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes an indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, the DU 174 can include an indication to indicate that the corresponding DU configuration is a full configuration.
  • Each of the indication(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N can be a field or IE (i.e., the same field or IE).
  • the CU 172 can include, in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 can include, in the additional RRC reconfiguration message, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N is/are full configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 can include, in the first container, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . .. , N, the CU 172 can include, in the first container, a particular indication indicating the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In the case of the second container, the CU 172 can include, in the second container, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 can include, in the element 1, includes an indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration l is a full configuration.
  • the CU 172 can include an indication indicating that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration.
  • the UE 102 can determine that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s) based on the indication(s) above.
  • each of the indication(s) above is different from a fullConfig field defined in the current 3GPP specification.
  • each of the indication(s) above is a fullConfig field defined in the current 3GPP specification.
  • the UE 102 in the event 336 does not apply the reference LTM DU configuration if received from the base station 104, e.g., in the RRC reconfiguration message 318.
  • the DU 174 might not include a/the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
  • the DU 174 can generate the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N as delta configuration(s) that augment (a portion of) the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ...N based on the reference LTM DU configuration. For example, if the LTM DU configuration 1 is a delta configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 augment (the portion of) the reference LTM DU configuration with the LTM DU configuration 1 .
  • the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and unaugment portion of the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • N exclude indication(s) indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, and/or 2... , N is/are full configuration(s) to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, . . . , N is/are delta configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 can determine that each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is a delta configuration based on that the indication is excluded in the LTM DU configuration(s) I and/or 2, ... ,N.
  • the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N are full configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, , N as full configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, .. . , N are delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving DU configuration not augmented by LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N as delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and the at least a portion of the serving DU configuration.
  • the UE 102 uses a UE MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) to communicate with a DU MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) of the DU 174 (e g., the events 302, 304, 318. 320, 324. 330 and/or 331).
  • the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity 7 , after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity 7 , the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the UE MAC entity 7 (i.e., UE MAC reset or full UE MAC reset):
  • timeAlignmentTimer(s) if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1 ); • set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0;
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the DU MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset or full DU MAC reset):
  • the UE 102 can determine to partially or fully reset the UE MAC entity.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 fully resets the UE MAC entity (i.e.. a full UE MAC reset). In the full UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs some or all of the actions described above.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 partially resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a partial UE MAC reset). In the partial UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full UE MAC reset.
  • the partial UE MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions:
  • timeAlignmeniTimer(s) of the UE 102 • consider timeAlignmeniTimer(s) of the UE 102 as expired, if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1);
  • the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions:
  • the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions:
  • the DU 174 can determine to partially or fully reset the DU MAC entity.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 fully resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a full DU MAC reset). In the full DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs some or all of the actions described above.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity’ as described above, the DU 174 partially resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a partial DU MAC reset). In the partial DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full DU MAC reset.
  • the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions in the partial MAC reset:
  • the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions for the MAC entity (i.e.. DU MAC reset):
  • the UE 102 refrains from resetting the UE MAC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 refrains from resetting the DU MAC entity after (e.g.. in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the UE MAC entity (not reset).
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the DU MAC entity (not reset) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 uses at least one UE RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) to communicate RLC PDUs with at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304. 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331).
  • the UE 102 reestablishes some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 may or may not include one or more RLC reestablishment indications (e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)) configuring the UE 102 to reestablish some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity.
  • RLC reestablishment indications e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the a RLC reestablishment indication configuring the UE 102 to reestablish a first UE RLC entity 7 , of the at least one UE RLC entity, that the UE 102 uses to communicate RLC PDU(s) with the DU 174
  • the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity in response to the RLC reestablishment indication and the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity while or after performing 332 the random access procedure. Otherwise if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity in response to the first LTM command. [0188] In some implementations, when the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the first UE RLC entity:
  • the state variables and timer(s) are defined in 3GPP TS 38.322.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In other words, the UE 102 refrains from preforming the actions for reestablishing the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and includes an indication indicating that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of at least one DU RLC entity (e.g.. NR RLC 206B) that the DU 174 uses to communicate with the at least one UE RLC entity of the UE 102 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331) in response to the RLC reestablishment indication.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes a first DU RLC entity of the at least one DU RLC entity after transmitting the first LTM command, receiving an acknowledgement for the first LTM command from the UE 102, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK. In other implementations, the acknowledgement is a MAC CE. In yet other implementations, the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission. In some implementations, when the base station 104 reestablishes the first DU RLC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the first DU RLC entity 7 :
  • the state variables and timer(s) are defined in 3GPP TS 38.322.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity (not reestablished).
  • the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity includes the first UE RLC entity and/or a second UE RLC entity.
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity (not reestablished) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity includes the first DU RLC entity and/or a second DU RLC entity.
  • the UE 102 uses at least one UE PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) to communicate UL PDCP PDUs and/or DL PDCP PDUs with at least one CU PDCP entity (e.g.. PDCP 210) of the CU 172 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery' procedure for a first UE PDCP entity' of the at least one UE PDCP entity', after or in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 may or may not reestablish the first UE PDCP entity.
  • the UE 102 can retransmit at least a portion of the UL PDCP PDUs to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336.
  • the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command.
  • the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery' procedure for a first CU PDCP entity of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command.
  • the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery' procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 334. In other implementations, the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message. In the PDCP recovery procedure, the CU 172 may or may' not reestablish the first CU PDCP entity. After or in response to performing the PDCP recovery' procedure, the CU 172 can retransmit at least a portion of the DL PDCP PDUs to the UE 102 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 340 or after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DL Data Delivery’ Status message.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity (not reestablished).
  • the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity (not reestablished) via the DU 174 and the first cell.
  • the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity includes the first CU PDCP entity and/or a second CU PDCP entity'.
  • the CU 172 can transmit 338 a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Request message) to the DU 174 to indicate the DU 174 to stop communicating with the UE 102 and/or to release or suspend resources, of the cell 124 A, configured for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 can stop communicating on the cell 124A with the UE 102 and/or release or suspend resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102, and transmit 340 a DU-to-CU message (e.g.. a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU-172.
  • the events 338 (optional) and 340 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a resource release or modification procedure 396.
  • the UE 102 transmits 344 at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement report includes at least one measurement result for a second cell (i.e., the cell 2).
  • the at least one measurement result indicates that the second cell is suitable for communication with UE 102 and/or the first cell is not suitable for communication with the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 and generates a second LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 (i.e., the second LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 2).
  • the DU 174 then transmits 350 the second LTM command to the UE on the first cell to the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 might transmit 349 to the CU 172 a DU-to- CU message indicating LTM (being) executed.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 2 or the ID 2 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 349 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 2.
  • the DU can transmit the DU-to-CU message 349 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 350.
  • the events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM execution procedure 398.
  • the events 304, 306, 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336. 396. 398, 356 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 380.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a source DU (S-DU) 174A and a target DU (T-DU) 174B.
  • the S-DU 174A operates the cell 124A and optionally additional cell(s), while the T-DU 174B operates a first cell (e g., cell 124C).
  • the scenario 400 is similar to the scenario 300. Thus, the descriptions for the scenario 300 can generally apply to the scenario 400. The differences between the scenarios 300 and 400 are described below.
  • the UE 102 communicates 402 with the S-DU 174A on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A.
  • the S-DU 174A is a serving DU similar to the DU 174 in Fig. 3 A.
  • the UE 102 transmits 404, 406 at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) to the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A. Based on the at least one measurement report, the CU 172 determines to prepare cell(s) 1, .. .
  • N (operated by the T-DU 174B) for LTM for the UE 102, where N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1.
  • the cell(s) 1, . . . , N are identified by cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 performs 490 a LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B to (request the T-DU 174B to) prepare cell(s) 1, ... , N for LTM for the UE 102.
  • N can be a positive integer larger than zero or 1.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including the cell ID(s) 1, ...
  • the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-DU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. .... N to the CU 172, similar to the event 310.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N configures the cell(s) 1, ... , N for LTM, respectively.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ••• , N include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) 1, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490 are UE Context Setup Request message and UE Context Setup Response message, respectively.
  • the CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N in a RRC reconfiguration message in a LTM configuration delivery procedure 494, similar to the LTM configuration delivery’ procedure 394.
  • the T-DU 174B can include cell index(es) 1, ... , N in the LTM DU configured on(s) 1. ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 1, , N to different values and include the cell index(es) 1, .. . , N in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 490.
  • the CU 172 After performing the LTM preparation procedure 490, the CU 172 might perform an additional LTM preparation procedure(s) with the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) N+l, • • ⁇ , N+M for LTM for the UE 102, similar to the procedure 490.
  • M is a positive integer larger than zero.
  • the CU 172 might determine to do so based on one or more measurement reports received from the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the events 404, 406.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including cell ID(s) N+l, .. . .
  • the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-DU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, • • • , N+M to the CU 172.
  • the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ⁇ ⁇ , N+M configures the cell(s) N+l, ⁇ ⁇ , N+M for LTM, respectively.
  • the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, N+M include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively.
  • the CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M in a RRC reconfiguration message in an additional LTM configuration delivery procedure, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394 or 494.
  • the LTM preparation procedure 490 is a UE Context Setup procedure and the additional LTM preparation procedure is a UE Context Modification procedure.
  • the LTM procedure 490 and the addition LTM preparation procedures are UE Context Setup procedures.
  • the LTM procedure 490 and the addition LTM preparation procedures are UE Context Modification procedures.
  • the CU 172 and S-DU 174A might perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the procedure 380 the CU 172 and S-DU 174A performs the procedure(s) 390 and/or 392 to prepare cell(s) of the S-DU 174A for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the value N in the procedure 380 or described for Fig. 3 can be the same as or different from the value N described for Fig. 4.
  • the CU 172 might receive the first DU-to-CU message including the reference LTM DU configuration from the S-DU 174A in the event 310.
  • the CU 172 and S-DU 174A does not perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 can perform 488 a reference LTM DU configuration query procedure with the S-DU 174A to obtain a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 transmits 460 a CU-to-DU message to the S- DU 174A to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 can include an indication in the CU-to-DU message to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the S-DU 174 A transmits 462 a DU-to-CU message including a reference LTM DU configuration to the CU 172.
  • the indication is a reference LTM DU configuration query indication.
  • the indication is a LTM indication
  • the CU 172 might include a query indication (e g., GNB-DU Configuration Query IE) in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration (received from the S-DU 174A) in the CU-to-DU message in the LTM preparation procedure 490.
  • the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172. In such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490. In the case of the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure.
  • the CU 172 might not include the reference LTM DU configuration in CU-to-DU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B.
  • the T-DU 174B In the case of the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ... , N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 does not provide a reference LTM DU configuration to the T-DU 174B in the LTM preparation procedure 490.
  • the T- DU 174B generates a reference LTM DU configuration and generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N based on the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the T- DU 174B includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490.
  • the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 490.
  • the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ...
  • the T-DU 174B might not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the T- DU 174B is different from the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the S-DU 174A.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the T-DU 174B is the same as the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 380 in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 490, and the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. . , N and/or N+l, .. . , N+M, considering or based on configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) of the procedure 380.
  • the LTM DU configuration X of the procedure 380 includes at least one reference signal (RS) resource configuration X, where 1 ⁇ X ⁇ N.
  • RS resource configuration(s) X configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell X of the S-DU 174A.
  • the RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s).
  • the RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s).
  • each of the RS resource configuration(s) X includes a RS resource configuration ID.
  • the RS resource configuration(s) X is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the LTM DU configuration X includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE and the CSI-MeasConfig IE includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the T-DU 174B generates at least one report configuration 1 for reporting, on the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the report configuration(s) I in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the report configured on(s) 1 is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConfig IE(s).
  • the T- DU 174B generates at least one RS resource configuration 1, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X and includes the RS resource configuration(s) 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the T-DU 174B includes the RS resource configuration(s) X in the RS resource configuration(s) 1. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B includes each of the RS resource configuration(s) X in the RS resource configuration(s) 1, except the RS resource configuration ID(s) in the RS resource configuration(s) X. The T- DU 174B assigns a RS resource configuration ID to a value for each of the RS resource configuration(s) 1 (including the RS resource configuration(s) X) and includes the RS resource configuration ID in the corresponding RS resource configuration.
  • the report configuration(s) 1 configures one or more UL resources (e.g.. PUCCH resources orPUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results.
  • each of the report configuration(s) 1 includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the RS resource configuration(s) 1.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B (i.e., the T-DU 17B becomes a S-DU for the UE 102) and transmits measurement results on the UL resource(s) via the cell 1 to the S-DU 174B, in accordance with the report configuration(s) 1.
  • the S-DU 174B receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 1 from the UE 102, in accordance with the report configuration(s) 1.
  • each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the RS resource configuration(s) 1 and/or the report configuration(s) 1 and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)).
  • the quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
  • the T-DU 174B also includes additional RS resource configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • Each of the additional RS resource configuration(s) configures one or more additional RSs or one or more additional RS resources associated with the cell 1.
  • the additional RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s).
  • the additional RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s).
  • each of the additional RS resource configuration(s) includes a RS resource configuration ID.
  • the additional RS resource configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s).
  • the T-DU 174B includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s) in the CSI-MeasConfig IE.
  • the T-DU 174B generates at least one additional report configuration for reporting, on the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the additional report configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the additional report configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConfig IE(s).
  • the additional report configuration(s) configures one or more UL resources (e.g.. PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results.
  • each of the additional report configuration(s) includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the additional RS resource configuration(s).
  • the S-DU 174B receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 1 from the UE 102, in accordance with the additional report configuration(s).
  • each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on the additional RS(s) or the additional RS resource(s) in accordance with the additional RS resource configuration(s) and/or the additional report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the additional RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)).
  • the quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
  • the T-DU 174B can generate RS resource configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M and/or report configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X, and include the RS resource configuration(s) 2, ... . N, and/or N+L .... N+M and/or the report configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M, respectively, as described above.
  • the LTM DU configuration X of the procedure 380 includes at least one TCI state configuration X, where I ⁇ X ⁇ N.
  • Each of the TCI state configuration(s) X configures a TCI state that associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type.
  • the DL RS(s) can be associated with the cell X operated by the S-DU 174A.
  • each of the TCI state configuration(s) X includes a TCI state ID.
  • each of the TCI state configuration(s) X is a TCI-State IE.
  • the TCI state configuration(s) X includes/is/are an ul-TCI-ToAddModList-r!7 field, one or more TCI-UL-State-r 17 IES, a dl- OrJointTCI-StateToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-State IEs, TCI-ActivatedConfig lE and/or a tci-StatesToAddModList field.
  • the LTM DU configuration X includes a PDSCH-Conflg IE and the PDSCH-Conflg IE includes the TCI state configuration(s) X.
  • the T-DU 174B generates at least one TCI state configuration 1, considering or based on the TCI state configuration(s) X and includes the TCI state configuration(s) 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the TCI state configuration(s) 1 includes the TCI state configuration(s) X.
  • the T-DU 174B includes each of the TCI state configuration(s) X in the TCI state configuration(s) 1, except the TCI state ID(s) in the TCI state configuration(s) X.
  • the T-DU 174B assigns a TCI state ID to a value for each of the TCI state configuration(s) 1 (including the TCI state configuration(s) X) and includes the TCI state ID in the corresponding TCI state configuration. While the UE 102 and the S-DU 174B communicate 436 with one another, the S-DU 174B might transmit a LTM command to the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a fast serving cell change to the cell X.
  • the S-DU 174B includes a TCI state ID in the LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to apply a TCI state configuration identified by the TCI state ID to communicate on the cell X, where the TCI state configuration is one of the TCI state configuration(s) X or includes configurations of one of the TCI state configuration(s) X.
  • the T-DU 174B can generate TCI state configuration(s) 2, ... , N, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X, and include the TCI state configuration(s) 2, .... N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. .... N, and/or N+l, ⁇ • N+M. respectively, as described above.
  • the CU 172 in cases where the CU 172 performs the procedure 380 after performing the procedure 490, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 490 in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 380, and the S-DU 174A generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. . .. , N of the procedure 380, considering or based on configurations in the LTM DU configuration(s) of the procedure 490, in a similar way as described above.
  • the CU 172 assigns ID(s) 1, N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, , N (received from the T-DU 174B), respectively, and performs the procedure 492 with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ... , N to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392.
  • the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) 1, ... , N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively.
  • the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) 1, ...
  • N identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) 1, ... , N (generated by the T-DU 174B), respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message of the procedure 490, similar to the event 310.
  • the CU 172 assigns ID(s) N+l. ... , N+M identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively, and performs a procedure (similar to the procedure 492) with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ...
  • the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) N+l, .. . , N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+L .... N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively.
  • the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message of the additional LTM preparation procedure, similar to the event 310.
  • the CU 172 transmits 412 a CU-to-DU message including the ID(s) 1 , ... , N to the S-DU 174 A and receives 414 a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response.
  • the CU-to-DU message 412 and DU-to-CU message 414 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as a LTM ID transfer procedure 493 or a LTM cell index transfer procedure 493.
  • the message 412 and message 414 can be UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ...
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In another implementation, the CU 172 includes the cell index(es) 1, ... , N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) 1, ... , N, cell ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) 1, ...
  • the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) 1, ... , N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM cell index transfer procedures to transmit the cell index(es) 1, , N, cell ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N to the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 includes particular portion of the cell index(es) 1, . . . , N, cell ID(s) 1, . . . , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N in a CU- to-DU message similar to the message 412.
  • the S-DU 174A associates the cell index(es) I , . . . . N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , . . . , N and/or the cell ID(s) 1 , . . . , N. respectively.
  • the S-DU 174A generates a first serving DU configuration, based on the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2,... , and/or N. and includes the first serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message 414.
  • the first serving DU configuration including configurations updating (e.g., augmenting, modifying or replacing) the serving DU configuration 402.
  • the first serving DU configuration includes configurations that are not included in the serving DU configuration 402.
  • the CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the first serving DU configuration to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 applies the first serving DU configuration to communicate with the serving DU upon receiving the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message is or is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 494.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174A using configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and not updated by the first serving DU configuration.
  • the following are example implementations of generating the first serving DU configuration based on the LTM DU configuration 1, ... , N.
  • the LTM DU configuration Y of the procedure 490 includes at least one RS resource configuration Y, where 1 ⁇ Y ⁇ N.
  • Each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell Y of the T-DU 174B.
  • the RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s).
  • the RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s).
  • each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y includes a RS resource configuration ID.
  • the RS resource configuration(s) Y is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the LTM DU configuration Y includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE and the CSI- MeasConfig IE includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the S-DU 174A generates at least one serving report configuration for reporting, on the cell 124A, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the serving report configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration.
  • the serving report configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConflg IE(s).
  • the S-DU 174A generates at least one serving RS resource configuration, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) Y and includes the serving RS resource configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A includes the RS resource configuration(s) Y in the serving RS resource configuration(s). In other implementations, the S-DU 174A includes each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y in the serving RS resource configuration(s). except the RS resource configuration ID(s) in the RS resource configuration(s) Y. The S-DU 174A assigns a RS resource configuration ID to a value for each of the serving RS resource configuration(s) (including the RS resource configuration(s) Y) and includes the RS resource configuration ID in the corresponding serving RS resource configuration.
  • the serving report configuration(s) configures one or more UU resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 124A for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results.
  • each of the serving report configuration(s) includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the serving RS resource configuration(s). While the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174A, the UE 102 transmits measurement results on the UL resource(s) via the cell 124A to the S-DU 174A, in accordance with the serving report configuration(s) (e.g., event 424).
  • the S-DU 174A receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 124A from the UE 102. in accordance with the serving report configuration(s).
  • each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the serving RS resource configuration(s) and/or the serving report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values.
  • the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)).
  • the quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
  • the LTM DU configuration Y of the procedure 490 includes at least one TCI state configuration Y, where 1 ⁇ Y ⁇ N.
  • Each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y configures a TCI state that associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type.
  • the DL RS(s) can be associated with the cell Y operated by the T-DU 174B.
  • each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y includes a TCI state ID.
  • each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y is a TCI-State IE.
  • Y includes/is/are an ul-TCI-ToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-UL-State-r 17 IES, a dl- OrJointTCI-StateToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-State IEs, TCI-ActivatedConflg IE and/or a tci-StatesToAddModList field.
  • the LTM DU configuration the LTM DU configuration
  • the S-DU 174A generates at least one serving TCI state configuration, considering or based on the TCI state configuration(s) Y and includes the serving TCI state configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration.
  • the serving TCI state configuration(s) 1 includes the TCI state configuration(s) Y.
  • the S-DU 174A includes each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y in the serving TCI state configuration(s), except the TCI state ID(s) in the TCI state configuration(s) Y.
  • the S-DU 174A assigns a TCI state ID to a value for each of the serving TCI state configuration(s) (including the TCI state configuration(s) Y) and includes the TCI state ID in the corresponding serving TCI state configuration. While the S-DU 174A communicate 436 with the UE 102, the S-DU 174A might transmit a LTM command to the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a fast serving cell change to the cell Y.
  • the S-DU 174 A includes a TCI state ID in the LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to apply a TCI state configuration identified by the TCI state ID to communicate on the cell Y, where the TCI state configuration is one of the TCI state configuration(s) Y or includes configurations of one of the TCI state configuration(s) Y.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M to the S-DU 174A and receives a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response, similar to the CU-to-DU message 412 and the DU-to-CU message 414, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) N+L ... , N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) N+l, ...
  • the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) N+l , . . . , N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, . . .
  • the S-DU 174A generates a second serving DU configuration, based on the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, N+2, and/or N+M, and includes the second serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message.
  • the second serving DU configuration including configurations updating (e.g., augmenting, modifying or replacing) the first serving DU configuration and/or updating configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and not updated by the first serving DU configuration.
  • the second serving DU configuration includes configurations that are not included in the first serving DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the second serving DU configuration to the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A.
  • the UE 102 applies the second serving DU configuration to communicate with the serving DU upon receiving the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message is or is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 494.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the S- DU 174A using configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and/or the first serving DU configuration and not updated by the second serving DU configuration.
  • the S-DU 174A generates one or more new LI measurement configurations, based on LI measurement configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, N+2,... , and/or N+M, and includes the new LI measurement configuration(s) in the second serving DU configuration.
  • the S-DU 174A generates one or more new TCI state configuration, based on TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l , N+2,... , and/or N+M, and includes the new TCI state configuration(s) in the second serving DU configuration.
  • value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ... ., N, and the ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400.
  • value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1. ... . N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1. ... ., N, and the cell ID(s) N+l ,...
  • the UE 102 might transmit 424 at least one measurement report to the S-DU 174A, similar to the event 324.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)) includes an event ID, first measurement result(s) for the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, and/or includes second measurement result(s) for the cell 124A.
  • the first measurement result(s) can be or include RSRP, RSRQ and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 1.
  • the second measurement result(s) can be or include RSRP. RSRQ and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 124A.
  • the event ID, RSRP, RSRQ and/or SINR are Ll-event ID, Ll-RSRP, Ll-RSRQ and/or Ll-SINR, respectively.
  • the S-DU 174A might transmit 430 a first LTM command (i. e. , LTM command 1) including the ID 1 to the UE 102 to order the UE 102 to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 of the T- DU 174B.
  • the first LTM command includes the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID).
  • the first LTM command includes the cell index 1.
  • the UE 102 When the UE 102 receives the first LTM command, the UE 102 performs a serving cell change to the cell 1 from a serving cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 might or might not perform 432 a random access procedure with the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 332. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or completing the random access procedure 432, the UE 102 might communicates 436 with the T-DU 174B on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 336.
  • the serving cell can be the cell 1 or cell 2 of the S-DU 174A. Otherwise, if no serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380 or the procedure 380 is not performed, the serving cell is the cell 124A.
  • the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1), based the LTM ID 1, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the first LTM command includes the cell index 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1, cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1) and/or LTM ID 1, based the cell index 1, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the T-DU 174B, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or successfully accessing the cell 1.
  • the S-DU 174A When or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command 430, the S-DU 174A might transmit 429 to the CU 172 a DU- to-CU message indicating LTM (being) executed.
  • the S-DU 174A includes the cell ID 1 or the LTM ID 1 in the DU-to-CU message 429 to indicate that the S- DU 174A is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a LTM serving cell change.
  • the S-DU 174A can transmit the DU-to-CU message 429 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 430.
  • the CU 172 when or after the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 429, the CU 172 might stop or suspend transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the S-DU 174A until receiving the DU-to-CU message 434. After receiving the DU-to-CU message 434. the CU 172 starts, continues or resumes transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the T-DU 174B. When or after the T-DU 174B detects that UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the T-DU 174B transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
  • a scenario 500 A the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN.
  • the SN 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174.
  • the scenario 500A is similar to the scenario 300. except that the scenario 500A is a DC scenario and the scenario 300 is a single connectivity (SC) scenario.
  • the MN 106 can include a CU and a DU similar to the base station 104 of Fig. 3.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates with the MN 106 and with SN 104.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302.
  • the UE 102 does not communicate with the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 in DC can communicate 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 and/or SN 104 via radio bearers which can include SRBs and/or DRB(s).
  • the MN 106 and/or the SN 104 can configure the radio bearers to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the SN 104 on an SCG (i.e., SCG radio resources) that the SN 104 configures for communication with the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 on an MCG (i.e., MCG radio resources) in accordance with a MN configuration (i.e., MCG configuration).
  • the serving DU configuration is a SN configuration (i.e., SCG configuration).
  • the MN 106 configures the MCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 126 and/or other cell(s)) operated by the MN 106.
  • the SN 106A configures the SCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 124A and/or other cell(s)) operated by the SN 104.
  • the MN configuration includes multiple configuration parameters and the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the MN 106.
  • the serving DU configuration includes multiple configuration parameters.
  • the UE 102 receives these configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the SN 104, e.g., via the MN 106 and/or on an SRB (e.g., SRB3) that the MN 106 or SN 104 configures to exchange RRC messages between the UE 102 and the SN 104.
  • SRB e.g., SRB3
  • the MN 106 can perform 580 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480.
  • the UE 102 can transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and cell 124A in the events 504 and 506, similar to the events 304 and 306, respectively.
  • the UE 102 can transmit 505 at least one measurement report to the MN 106 via the cell 126.
  • the MN 106 in turn transmits 507 the at least one measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the MN 106 generates at least one SN message including the at least one measurement report and transmits the at least one SN message to the CU 172 in the event 507.
  • the at least one SN message include RRC Transfer message(s) and/or SN Modification Request message(s).
  • the SN 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the events 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, and 556 are similar to the events 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332. 334, 336, 396, 398, and 356, respectively.
  • the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 536 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates 536 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 336.
  • the DU 174 and/or CU 172 can perform the LTM execution procedure 598 with the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a cell change from the first cell to the second cell, similar to the procedure 398 or 498.
  • the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 556 with the DU 174 on the second cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 2 and communicates 556 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 356.
  • the events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5A as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 581.
  • a scenario 500B is generally similar to the scenario 500A, except that the SN 104 transmits 517, 519 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 521, 523 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message 517. 519 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message 521, 523 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 320, 322.
  • the SN 104 generates a first SN message (e.g., SN Modification Required message, SN Modification Required message, or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits the first SN message to the MN 106 in the event 517.
  • the MN 106 generates a MN RRC message including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits 519 the MN RRC message to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 generates a MN RRC response message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits 521 the MN RRC response message to the MN 106.
  • the MN 106 generates a second SN message (e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits the second SN message to the SN 104 in the event 523.
  • a second SN message e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message
  • the MN RRC message and MN RRC response message can be a RRC reconfiguration message and a RRC reconfiguration complete message, respectively.
  • the events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 517, 519, 521, 523, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5B as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 582.
  • the base station 106 operates as an MN
  • the base station 104 operates as an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-500B.
  • the SN 104 includes a CU 172, an S-DU 174A and a T-DU 174B, similar to the base station 104 in the scenario 400.
  • the MN 106 can perform 680 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480.
  • the CU 172 can perform 681 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A or S-DU 174B. similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
  • a scenario 600B similar to the scenarios 300-500B and 600 A, except that that the SN 104 transmits 617, 619 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 621, 623 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
  • the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-600B.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A and a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B.
  • the CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN. similar to the base station 104 in Fig. 3 or the MN 106 in Figs. 5A-6B, and the CU 172 operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN, similar to the SN 104 in Figs. 5A-6B.
  • the UE 102 initially communicates 702 in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B and communicates 702 with the CU 172 via the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174B using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302.
  • Events 704 and 706 are similar to the events 304 and 306.
  • the UE 102 can transmit 705 at least one measurement report to the M-DU 174A, similar to the event 304.
  • the M-DU 174A in turn transmits 707 at least one DU-to-CU message including the at les tone measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 780 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380.
  • the events 704, 706. 705, 707. 790, 792. 794, 724. 726, 728, 729, 730, 731 , 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7A as a LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 781.
  • a scenario 700B similar to the scenarios 300-600B and 700 A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 717, 719 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 721. 723 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174 A.
  • Fig. 7B The events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 717, 719, 721, 723, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7B as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 782.
  • Fig. 8A Referring next to Fig. 8A, in a scenario 800A, the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-700B.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A, a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B and a target secondary DU (T-DU) 174C.
  • the CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN and operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 880 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A. similar to the procedure 380.
  • the CU 172 can perform 881 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the S-DU 174 A, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
  • a scenario 800B similar to the scenarios 300-700B and 800 A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 817, 819 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 821, 823 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174 A.
  • a RAN node e.g., a base station, a DU or a CU
  • a UE for configuring and/or activating one or more TCI state configurations for a LTM candidate cell (i.e., a cell for LTM)
  • a LTM candidate cell i.e., a cell for LTM
  • Fig. 9A illustrates an example method 900A, which can be implemented by a DU (e.g.. the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B).
  • a DU e.g.. the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B.
  • the method 900A begins at block 902, where the DU receives a first CU-to-DU message from a CU, including a first CSI resource configuration list, where the list includes at least one first CSI resource configuration (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493. 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893).
  • first CSI resource configuration e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493. 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893.
  • the DU generates a first CSI report configuration list based on the first CSI resource configuration list, where the first CSI report configuration list includes at least one first CSI report configuration for reporting one or more CSI reports of one or more CSI resources configured in the first CSI resource configuration(s).
  • the DU transmits a first DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390. 314, 392. 462, 488, 490. 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the DU includes the first CSI report configuration list in a first DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the first DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU transmits includes the first CSI report configuration list or the first DU configuration in a first message and transmits the first message to the UE via a RAN node.
  • the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316. 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894.
  • the RAN node is the DU, another DU or a base station.
  • the first DU configuration is a serving DU configuration.
  • the first DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
  • the flow might proceed to block 908 where the DU receives a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI resource configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the first CSI resource configuration(s) e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893.
  • the flow might proceed to block 910 where the DU might generate a CSI report configuration release list to release at least one of the CSI report configuration(s), based on the CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s).
  • the DU might transmit a second DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the CSI report configuration release list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the CSI report configuration release list e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the DU releases the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s).
  • the DU includes the CSI report configuration release list in a second DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the second DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU transmits includes the CSI report configuration release list or the second DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via the RAN node.
  • the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318. 394, 494. 594, 694. 794, 894.
  • the second DU configuration is a serving DU configuration.
  • the second DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
  • the CU-to-DU message described above can be a UE Context Setup Request message or a UE Context Modification Request message.
  • the DU-to-CU message described above can be a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message.
  • the DU-to-CU message described above is a UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the CU might transmit a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU.
  • the DU might transmit an additional DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU in response to the CU-to-DU message.
  • the first CSI resource configuration list is an Itm-CSI- ResourceConfigToAddModList field or IE.
  • each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) in the first CSI resource configuration list is an LTM-CSI- ResourceConfig IE.
  • each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes a CSI resource configuration ID (e.g.. LTM-CSI-ResourceConfigld) identifying the CSI resource configuration.
  • each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes a CSI resource set (e.g., a CSI SSB resource set or a CSI-RS resource set).
  • the first CSI resource configuration list is associated to a cell (e.g., a LTM candidate cell).
  • each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes one or more LTM IDs identifying respective LTM DU configuration(s).
  • each CSI resource set includes one or more LTM IDs identifying respective LTM DU configuration(s).
  • a CSI resource configuration in the first CSI resource configuration list includes a CSI resource configuration ID the same as an existing CSI resource configuration (i.e., received by or stored in the DU before receiving the first CU-to-DU message)
  • the DU modifies or replaces the existing CSI resource configuration with the received CSI resource configuration. If a CSI resource configuration and an associated CSI resource configuration ID are not received by the UE, the DU stores the received CSI resource configuration.
  • the CSI resource configuration release list is an Itm-CSI- ResourceConfigToReleaseList.
  • the CSI resource configuration release list includes at least one CSI resource configuration ID to release or indicate releasing the at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s). Each of the at least one CSI resource configuration ID identifies a respective one of the first CSI resource configuration(s).
  • the first CU-to-DU message requests to prepare a LTM candidate cell for the UE.
  • the candidate cell is the first cell (i.e., cell 1) described for Figs. 3-8B.
  • the CU includes a cell ID (e.g., CGI) of the LTM candidate cell in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU generates a LTM DU configuration for the LTM candidate cell.
  • the CU includes a LTM ID in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU includes a cell (e.g., CGI) of a serving cell of the UE in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU may refrain from generating a LTM DU configuration in response to receiving the first CU-to-DU message including the cell ID of the serving cell.
  • the DU is a serving DU or a source DU.
  • the DU stores a mapping list including one or more ⁇ CSI report configuration, SSBRI, LTM ID ⁇ s for one or more respective LTM candidate cells.
  • Each the CSI report configuration configures time and/or frequency resources for the UE to transmit a CSI report.
  • the DU receives a CSI report (e.g., LTM CSI report) on time and/or frequency resources from the UE and the CSI report includes a SS/PBCH Resource Block Indicator (SSBRI).
  • SSBRI SS/PBCH Resource Block Indicator
  • the DU looks up the mapping list to identify a corresponding LTM ID in accordance with the received SSBRI and the time and/or frequency resources where the SSBRI is received.
  • the DU may determine to command the UE to perform a LTM cell switch and transmit a LTM command including the LTM ID to the UE (e.g.. events 330, 430, 530, 630, 730, 830).
  • each of the ⁇ CSI report configuration, SSBRI, LTM ID ⁇ s may include a CGI for a respective LTM candidate cell.
  • the DU may identify a CGI of a LTM candidate cell based on the received SSBRI and the time and/or frequency resources where the SSBRI is received.
  • the DU may transmit a DU-to-CU message including the CGI to the CU to indicate that the UE is performing a LTM cell switch to the LTM candidate cell (e.g., events 329, 429, 529, 629, 729, 829).
  • Fig. 9B is a flow diagram of an example method 900B similar to the method 900A, except that the method 900B includes blocks 909, 911, 913. and 915 instead of blocks 908, 910, 912, and 914.
  • the method 900B begins at blocks 902, 904, and 906. The flow might then proceed to block 909 where the DU receive a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a second CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392. 460, 488, 490. 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list, based on the second CSI resource configuration list.
  • the DU transmits a second DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the second CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390. 314, 392, 462. 488, 490, 492. 414, 493, 590. 592, 688. 690. 692, 693. 790. 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the DU replaces the first CSI report configuration list with the second CSI report configuration list.
  • the DU includes the second CSI report configuration list in a second DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the second DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU transmits includes the second CSI report configuration list or the second DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via the RAN node.
  • the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894.
  • the second DU configuration is a serving DU configuration.
  • the second DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
  • the DU determines whether the second CSI resource configuration list is identical to the first CSI resource configuration. If the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is different from the first CSI resource configuration, the DU performs the actions described at blocks 911, 913, and/or 915. In such a case, the DU may replace the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. Otherwise, if the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is the same as the first CSI resource configuration, the DU does not perform actions described at blocks 911, 913, and 915. Alternatively, in such a case, the DU still performs the actions described at blocks 911, 913, and/or 915.
  • the DU includes the second CSI report configuration list in a third serving DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the third serving DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU transmits includes the second CSI report configuration list or the third serving DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via a RAN node.
  • the second message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894.
  • the DU replaces the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list.
  • the method 900B can be combined with the method 900A by change the '‘first CSI report configuration’’ to the “second CSI report configuration”.
  • Examples and implementations of the first CSI resource configuration list and the first CSI report configuration list as described for Fig. 9A can apply to the second CSI resource configuration list and the second CSI report configuration list.
  • Fig. 9C is a flow diagram of an example method 900C similar to the methods 900A and 900B, except that the method 900C includes blocks 921 and 925 instead of blocks 911 and 915.
  • the method 900C begins at blocks 902, 904, and/or 906, and might proceed to block
  • the flow might proceed to block 921 where the DU receives a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a second CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390. 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492. 412, 493, 590. 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888. 890, 892, or 893).
  • the DU modifies the first CSI report configuration list with the second CSI report configuration list.
  • the DU determines whether the second CSI resource configuration list is identical to the first CSI resource configuration. If the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration hst is different from the first CSI resource configuration, the DU performs the actions described at blocks 921, 913 and/or 925. In such a case, the DU may modify the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. Otherwise, if the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is the same as the first CSI resource configuration, the DU does not perform actions described at blocks 921, 913 and 925.
  • CSI resource configuration ID(s) for the second CSI resource configuration(s) are different from the CSI resource configuration(s) for the first CSI resource configuration(s).
  • the second CSI report configuration(s) are extra CSI report configuration(s) in addition to the first CSI report configuration(s).
  • the DU modifies the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list.
  • the method 900C can be combined with the method 900A by change the “first CSI report configuration” to the “second CSI report configuration”.
  • FIG. 1 OA illustrates an example method 1000A, which can be implemented by a CU (e.g., the CU 172 in Figs. 3-8B).
  • a CU e.g., the CU 172 in Figs. 3-8B.
  • the method 1000A begins at block 1002, where the CU transmits a first CU-to-DU message to a DU, including a first CSI resource configuration list, where the list includes at least one first CSI resource configuration (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • first CSI resource configuration e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893.
  • the CU receives a first DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a first CSI report configuration list, where the first CSI report configuration list includes at least one first CSI report configuration for reporting one or more CSI reports of one or more CSI resources configured in the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893 e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 6
  • the CU transmits a first message including the first CSI report configuration hst to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819).
  • a first message including the first CSI report configuration hst to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819).
  • the flow might proceed to block 1008 where the CU transmits a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, including a CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI resource configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the first CSI resource configuration(s) e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893.
  • the CU receive a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a CSI report configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 462. 488, 490, 492. 414, 493. 590, 592, 688. 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the CU transmits a second message including the CSI report configuration release list to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494. 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819).
  • blocks 902, 906, 908, and 912 can apply to blocks 1002, 1006, 1008, and 1012.
  • Fig. 10B is a flow diagram of an example method 1000B similar to the method 1000A, except that the method 1000B includes block 1009, 1013, and 1015 instead of blocks 1008, 1012, and 1014.
  • the method 1000B begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007.
  • the flow might proceed to block 1009 where the CU Transmit a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, including a second CSI resource configuration list to replace the first CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693. 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893).
  • events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693. 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893 e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693. 790, 792
  • the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the flow might proceed to block 1015 where the CU transmits a second message including the second CSI report configuration list to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817- 819).
  • a second message including the second CSI report configuration list e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817- 819.
  • blocks 909, 911, and 913 can apply to blocks 909 and 913.
  • Fig. 10C is a flow diagram of an example method 1000C similar to the methods 1000A and 1000B, except that the method 1000C includes block 1023 instead of block 1013.
  • the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a second CSI report configuration list to augment (e.g., modify or update) the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 462, 488. 490, 492, 414. 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). Examples and implementations for blocks 921 and 913 can apply to block 1023.
  • Fig. HA illustrates an example method 1100A similar to block 900A, which can be implemented by a DU (e.g., the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B).
  • a DU e.g., the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B.
  • the method 1100A begins at blocks 902, 904, and 906.
  • the flow then proceeds to block 1102 where the DU transmits an additional DU-to-CU message including a LTM DU configuration for a LTM candidate cell to the CU (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 490. 492. 590, 592, 690, 692, 790, 792, 890, 892).
  • the DU receives an additional CU-to-DU message requesting to configure the LTM candidate cell from the CU (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 490, 492, 590, 592, 690, 692, 790, 792, 890, 892).
  • the additional CU-to-DU message may include a cell ID (e.g.. CGI) of the candidate cell.
  • the DU In response to the additional CU-to-DU message, the DU generates the LTM DU configuration.
  • the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message. In such cases, the DU receives a UE Context Modification Confirm message from the CU in response.
  • the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message.
  • the additional CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Setup Request message or a UE Context Modification Request message.
  • the additional DU-to-CU message and the first DU-to-CU message can be combined as a single DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the additional CU-to-DU message and the first CU-to-DU message can be combined as a single CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU might receive a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell.
  • the DU releases the LTM DU configuration.
  • the flow might proceed to block 1110 where the DU generates a CSI report configuration release list to release at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s).
  • the flow might then proceed to blocks 912 and/or 914.
  • the DU receives the second CU-to-DU message, and the DU releases the LTM DU configuration in response to the second CU-to-DU message at block 1106.
  • the DU determines to release the LTM DU configuration by itself without receiving a CU-to-DU message indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell. In such cases, the DU releases the LTM DU configuration in response to the determination.
  • the CU includes the cell ID in the second CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU includes the cell ID in the second DU-to-CU message.
  • Fig. 11B is a flow diagram of an example method 1100B similar to the methods 1100A and 900B, except that the method 1100B includes blocks 1111, 913, and 915 instead of blocks 1110, 912, and 914.
  • the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration.
  • the flow might then proceed to blocks 913 and/or 915.
  • Fig. 11C is a flow diagram of an example method 1100C similar to the methods 1100A and 1100B, except that the method 1100C includes block 1121 instead of block 1111.
  • the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to augment (e.g., modify or update) the first CSI report configuration list in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration.
  • the flow might then proceed to blocks 913 and/or 915.
  • Fig. 12A illustrates an example method 1200A, which can be implemented by a CU (e.g., the CU 172 in Figs. 3-8B).
  • the method 1200A is similar to block 1000A except the method 1200A includes blocks 1202, 1204, 1208, and 1212 instead of blocks 1008 and 1012.
  • the method 1200A begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007.
  • the flow proceeds to block 1202 where the CU receives an additional DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a LTM DU configuration for a LTM candidate cell.
  • the flow might proceed to block 1204 where the CU transmits an additional message including the LTM DU configuration to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819).
  • the additional message and the first message can be combined as a single message.
  • the flow might proceed to block 1208 where the CU transmits a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a CSI report configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) (e.g.. events 310. 390. 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
  • Fig. 12B is a flow diagram of an example method 1200B similar to the methods 1200A and 1000B, except that the method 1200B does not include block 1212.
  • the method 1200B begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007 and then proceeds to blocks 1202 and might further proceed to blocks 1204 and 1208. The flow might then proceed to blocks 1013 and/or 1015.
  • Fig. 12C is a flow diagram of an example method 1200C similar to the methods 1200A. 1200B, and 1000C, except that the method 1200C does not include block 1212.
  • the method 1200C begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007 and then proceeds to blocks 1202, 1204, and/or 1208. The flow might then proceed to blocks 1023 and/or 1015.
  • description for one of the above figures can apply to another of the above figures. Examples, implementations and methods described above can be combined, if there is no conflict.
  • An event or block described above can be optional or omitted.
  • an event or block with dashed lines in the figures can be optional.
  • the description described from the perspective of the receiving node also applies to the sending node. For example, a description that a receiving node (e.g., DU) receives a message from a sending node (e.g., CU) may be replaced by the sending node sending a message to the receiving node.
  • a receiving node e.g., DU
  • a sending node e.g., CU
  • a description that a receiving node (e.g., CU) receives a message from a sending node (e.g., DU) may be replaced by the sending node sending a message to the receiving node.
  • “message” is used and can be replaced by “information element (IE)”, and vice versa.
  • “IE” is used and can be replaced by “field”, and vice versa.
  • “configuration” can be replaced by “configurations” or “configuration parameters”, and vice versa.
  • the “LTM command” can be replaced by “serving cell change command”, “Layer 1/Layer 2 LTM cell switch command”, “lower layer switching command” or “lower layer serving cell change command”.
  • “some” means “one or more”.
  • “at least one” means “one or more”.
  • the “DU configuration” can be replaced by “cell group configuration”.
  • the “cell index” can be replaced with “serving cell index”. “LTM cell index”, “special cell (SpCell) index”, “PCell index” or “PSCell index”.
  • the “serving” can be replaced by “source”.
  • the “measurement report” can be replaced by “measurement result(s)”.
  • the “early TA acquisition” can be replaced by “early UL timing synchronization” or “early UL synchronization”. In some implementations, the “early TA acquisition on a/the candidate cell” can be replaced by “early UL timing synchronization with a/the candidate cell” or “early UL synchronization with a/the candidate cell”.
  • the user device can operate as an intemet-of-things (loT) device or a mobile-internet device (MID).
  • the user device can include one or more general-purpose processors, a computer-readable memory, a user interface, one or more network interfaces, one or more sensors, etc.
  • Modules may can be software modules (e.g., code, or machine- readable instructions stored on non-transitory machine-readable medium) or hardware modules.
  • a hardware module is a tangible unit capable of performing certain operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner.
  • a hardware module can comprise dedicated circuitry or logic that is permanently configured (e.g., as a special-purpose processor, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), etc.) to perform certain operations.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • a hardware module may also comprise programmable logic or circuitry' (e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor) that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations.
  • programmable logic or circuitry' e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor
  • the decision to implement a hardware module in dedicated and permanently configured circuitry, or in temporarily configured circuitry (e.g, configured by software) may be driven by cost and time considerations.
  • the techniques can be provided as part of the operating system, a library used by multiple applications, a particular software application, etc.
  • the software can be executed by one or more general-purpose processors or one or more special-purpose processors.
  • Example 1 is a method of wireless communication at a DU of a base station, comprising: receiving, from a CU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report; transmitting, to the CU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations; receiving, from the CU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and transmitting, to the CU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 2 is the method of example 1, where the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
  • Example 3 is the method of any of examples 1 -2, wherein the third message further indicates a third list of CSI resource configurations, the modification being to release the third list of CSI resource configurations from the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 4 is the method of any of examples 1 -3, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, further including releasing the first CSI resource for the CSI report according to the release indicated in the fourth message.
  • Example 5 is the method of any of examples 1-4, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to replace the first list of CSI resource configurations with a different list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 6 is the method of any of examples 1-5, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource, the second CSI resource being available for the CSI report.
  • Example 7 is the method of any of examples 1-6, further including replacing the first CSI resource for the CSI report with the second CSI resource for the CSI report according to the replacement indicated in the fourth message.
  • Example 8 is the method of any of examples 1-7, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to augment the first list of CSI resource configurations with a further list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 9 is the method of any of examples 1-8, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
  • Example 10 is the method of any of examples 1-9, further including augmenting the first CSI resource with the second CSI according to the augmentation indicated in the fourth message.
  • Example 11 is the method of any of examples 1-10, further including indicating, to the CU, a LTM configuration for an LTM candidate cell.
  • Example 12 is the method of any of examples 1-11, further including receiving, from the CU, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell; and releasing the LTM configuration based on the release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
  • Example 13 is the method of any of examples 1-12, further including generating a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 14 is the method of any of examples 1-13, where the transmitting the fourth message indicating the adjustment to the first CSI resource is based on the releasing the LTM configuration, the adjustment being at least one of a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource available for the CSI report, or an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
  • Example 15 is a method of wireless communication at a CU of a base station, comprising: transmitting, to a DU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report; receiving, from the DU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being associated with the first list of CSI resource configurations; transmitting, to a UE, a first indication of the second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report; transmitting, to the DU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and receiving, from the DU based on the third message, a fourth message comprising a CSI report configuration indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, wherein the CSI report configuration includes a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations ⁇ the fourth message including
  • Example 16 is the method of example 15, where the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
  • Example 17 is the method of any of examples 15-16, where the third message further indicates a third list of CSI resource configurations, the modification being to release the third list of CSI resource configurations from the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 18 is the method of any of examples 15-17, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report.
  • Example 19 is the method of any of examples 15-18, further including receiving, from the DU, a LTM configuration for an LTM candidate cell; and transmitting, to the DU, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
  • Example 20 is the method of any of examples 15-19, further including receiving, from the DU, a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 21 is the method of any of examples 15-20, further including transmitting, to the UE, a release message indicating the release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report.
  • Example 22 is the method of any of examples 15-21, further including transmitting, to the UE, a second indication indicting the CSI report configuration release list.
  • Example 23 is the method of any of examples 15-22, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to replace the first list of CSI resource configurations with a different list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 24 is the method of any of examples 15-23, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource, the second CSI resource being available for the CSI report.
  • Example 25 is the method of any of examples 15-24, further including transmitting, to the UE, a replacement message indicating the replacement of the first CSI resource for the CSI report with the second CSI resource for the CSI report.
  • Example 26 is the method of any of examples 15-25, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to augment the first list of CSI resource configurations with a further list of CSI resource configurations.
  • Example 27 is the method of any of examples 15-26, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
  • Example 28 is the method of any of examples 15-27, further including transmitting, to the UE, an augmentation message indicating the augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
  • Example 29 is the method of any of examples 15-28. further including receiving, from the first network entity, a LTM configuration of the first network entity for an LTM candidate cell; and transmitting, to the UE, a second indication of the LTM configuration of the first network entity for the LTM candidate cell.
  • Example 30 is the method of any of examples 15-29, further including transmitting, to the first network entity, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
  • Example 31 is the method of any of examples 15-30, where the receiving the fourth message indicating the adjustment to the first CSI resource is based on the releasing the LTM candidate cell, the adjustment being at least one of a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource available for the CSI report, or an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
  • Example 32 is the method of any of examples 15-31, where the first network entity is a DU of a base station and the second network entity is a CU of the base station.
  • Example 33 is an apparatus for wireless communication for implementing a method as in any of examples 1-32.
  • Example 34 is an apparatus for wireless communication including means for implementing a method as in any of examples 1-32.
  • Example 35 is a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer executable code, the code when executed by a processor causes the processor to implement a method as in any of examples 1-32.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A DU of a base station receives (902), from a CU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report. The DU transmits (906), to the CU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report. The second list of CSI resources is selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations. The DU receives (908, 909), from the CU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations. The DU transmits (912, 913), to the CU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, where the fourth message includes a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.

Description

MANAGING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION RESOURCE AND REPORT CONFIGURATIONS
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION(S)
[0001] This application claims the benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 63/595,661, entitled “Managing Channel State Information Resource and Report Configurations” and filed on November 2, 2023, which is expressly incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0002] This disclosure relates to wireless communications and, more particularly, to managing channel state information (CSI) resource and report configurations for a user equipment (UE).
BACKGROUND
[0003] This background description is provided for the purpose of generally presenting the context of the disclosure. Work of the presently named inventors, to the extent it is described in this background section, as well as aspects of the description that may not otherwise qualify as prior art at the time of filing, are neither expressly nor impliedly admitted as prior art against the present disclosure.
[0004] In telecommunication systems, the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) sublayer of the radio protocol stack provides services such as transfer of user-plane data, ciphering, integrity protection, etc. For example, the PDCP layer defined for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) radio interface (see 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) technical specification (TS) 36.323) and New Radio (NR) (see 3GPP TS 38.323) provides sequencing of protocol data units (PDUs) in the uplink direction (from a user device, also known as a user equipment (UE), to a base station) as well as in the downlink direction (from the base station to the UE). Further, the PDCP sublayer provides signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs) to the Radio Resource Control (RRC) sublayer. Generally speaking, the UE and a base station can use SRBs to exchange RRC messages as well as non-access stratum (NAS) messages, and can use DRBs to transport data on a user plane. [0005] UEs can use several types of SRBs and DRBs. When operating in dual connectivity (DC), the cells associated with the base station operating the master node (MN) define a master cell group (MCG), and the cells associated with the base station operating as the secondary node (SN) define the secondary cell group (SCG). So-called SRB1 resources carry RRC messages, which in some cases include NAS messages over the dedicated control channel (DCCH), and SRB2 resources support RRC messages that include logged measurement information or NAS messages, also over the DCCH but with lower priority than SRB1 resources. More generally, SRB1 and SRB2 resources allow the UE and the MN to exchange RRC messages related to the MN and embed RRC messages related to the SN, and also can be referred to as MCG SRBs. SRB3 resources allow the UE and the SN to exchange RRC messages related to the SN, and can be referred to as SCG SRBs. Split SRBs allow the UE to exchange RRC messages directly with the MN via lower layer resources of the MN and the SN. Further, DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the MN can be referred as MCG DRBs, DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the SN can be referred as SCG DRBs, and DRBs using the lower-layer resources of both the MCG and the SCG can be referred to as split DRBs.
[0006] The UE in some scenarios can concurrently utilize resources of multiple radio access network (RAN) nodes (e.g., base stations or components of a distributed base station), interconnected by a backhaul. When these network nodes support different radio access technologies (RATs), this type of connectivity is referred to as Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity (MR-DC). When a UE operates in MR-DC, one base station operates as a master node (MN) that covers a primary' cell (PCell), and the other base station operates as a secondary' node (SN) that covers a primary' secondary cell (PSCell). The UE communicates with the MN (via the PCell) and the SN (via the PSCell). In other scenarios, the UE utilizes resources of one base station at a time. One base station and/or the UE determines that the UE should establish a radio connection with another base station. For example, one base station can determine to hand the UE over to the second base station, and initiate a handover procedure.
[0007] When the UE moves from coverage area of one cell to another cell in a RAN, at some point a serving cell change has to be performed for the UE. To perform the serving cell change, the RAN configures the UE to transmit layer 3 (L3) measurement results. Based on L3 measurement results received from the UE, the RAN transmits a RRC reconfiguration message configuring Reconfiguration with Synchronization (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message includes a ReconflgurationWithSync IE) for change of the serving cell (e.g., PCell or PSCell). In cases where the UE operates in carrier aggregation (CA) of at least one secondary cell (SCell) with the PCell or PSCell, the RAN has to release the at least one SCell due to the change of the PCell or PSCell. The serving cell change involves complete L2 (and LI) resets, leading to longer latency, larger overhead and longer interruption time. Thus, 3GPP recently launched anew work item, described in RP-221799, to develop new mobility techniques for serving cell changes. These techniques aim to reduce latency and overhead, and are called low-layer triggered mobility (LTM) cell switch, or faster serving cell switching.
[0008] The RAN transmits a serving configuration to the UE and communicates with the UE via a serving cell based on the serving configuration. The serving configuration includes a plurality of configuration parameters for communication between the UE and RAN. For example, the serving configuration includes configuration parameters for a first radio bearer (e.g., SRB or DRB). While the RAN communicates with the UE via the serving cell, the RAN receives one or more layer 3 (e.g., RRC) measurement results from the UE. Based on the layer 3 (L3) measurement result(s), the RAN determines to configure a LTM candidate cell for LTM cell switch. To configure the LTM candidate cell for the UE, the RAN transmits a LTM configuration configuring the LTM candidate cell to the UE via RRC signaling. In some implementations, the RAN includes the configuration parameters for the first radio bearer in the LTM configuration. Later on, the RAN receives one or more layer 1 (LI) measurement results from the UE. Based on the one or more LI measurement result(s), the RAN determines that the LTM candidate cell qualifies to be a serving cell for the UE. Therefore, the RAN transmits a LTM cell switch command to the UE to command the UE to perform the LTM cell switch to the LTM candidate cell. The UE performs a cell change from the serving cell to the LTM candidate cell in response to the LTM cell switch command. In response to the cell change, the UE disconnects from the serving cell and accesses the LTM candidate cell. After the UE successfully accesses the LTM candidate cell, the UE communicates with the RAN via the LTM candidate cell and the LTM candidate cell becomes a new serving cell for the UE.
[0009] To configure the UE to transmit LI measurement results (i.e., channel state information (CSI) report, the RAN configures CSI resources for the UE to measure. Currently, a CU can transmit a single LTM CSI resource configuration for a UE to a DU as specified in R3-235894. In some scenarios, the CU may have multiple LTM CSI resource configurations for the UE. In such cases, it is not clear how the CU transmit the LTM CSI resource configurations to the DU. In other scenarios, the CU may need to update the LTM CSI resource configuration(s) that were transmitted to the DU, which is not supported in R3-235894.
Figure imgf000005_0001
[0010] A distributed unit (DU) of a base station receives, from a central unit (CU) of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report. The DU transmits, to the CU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report. The second list of CSI resources is selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations. The DU receives, from the CU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations. The DU transmits, to the CU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0011] A CU of the base station transmits, to a DU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report. The CU receives, from the DU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report. The second list of CSI resources is associated with the first list of CSI resource configurations. The CU transmits, to a UE, a first indication of the second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report. The CU transmits, to the DU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations. The CU receives, from the DU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0012] Fig. 1A is a block diagram of an example system in which a radio access network (RAN) and a user device can implement the techniques of this disclosure for managing conditional procedures related to a secondary node (SN);
[0013] Fig. IB is a block diagram of an example base station including a central unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) that can operate in the system of Fig. 1A;
[0014] Fig. 2A is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with base stations;
[0015] Fig. 2B is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with a CU and a DU;
[0016] Fig. 3 is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that includes a CU and a DU, where the DU operates the cell.
[0017] Fig. 4 is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that includes a CU, a source DU (S-DU), and a target DU (T-DU). [0018] Fig. 5A is a signaling diagram illustrating a first base station that operates as an MN and a second base station that operates as an SN.
[0019] Fig. 5B is a signaling diagram where the SN transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the MN and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the MN.
[0020] Fig. 6A is a signaling diagram illustrating a first base station that operates as an MN and a second base station that operates as an SN.
[0021] Fig. 6B is a signaling diagram where the SN transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the MN and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the MN.
[0022] Fig. 7A is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that operates as an MN and an SN.
[0023] Fig. 7B is a signaling diagram where the CU transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the M-DU and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the M-DU.
[0024] Fig. 8A is a signaling diagram illustrating a base station that operates as an MN and an SN.
[0025] Fig. 8B is a signaling diagram where the CU transmits the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE via the M-DU and receives the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE via the M-DU.
[0026] Figs. 9A-9C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a DU.
[0027] Figs. 10A-10C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a CU.
[0028] Figs. 11 A-l 1C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a DU.
[0029] Figs. 12A-12C are flowcharts of methods of wireless communication at a CU.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0030] Fig. 1A depicts an example wireless communication system 100 in which communication devices can implement these techniques. The wireless communication system 100 includes a UE 102, a base station (BS) 104, a base station 106 and a core network (CN) 1 10. The UE 102 initially connects to the base station 104. In some scenarios, the base station 104 can perform an SN addition to configure the UE 102 to operate in dual connectivity (DC) with the base station 104 and the base station 106. The base stations 104 and 106 operate as an MN and an SN for the UE 102. respectively. [0031] In various configurations of the wireless communication system 100, the base station 104 can be implemented as a master eNB (MeNB) or a master gNB (MgNB), and the base station 106 can be implemented as a secondary gNB (SgNB). The UE 102 can communicate with the base station 104 and the base station 106 via the same RAT such as EUTRA or NR, or different RATs. When the base station 104 is an MeNB and the base station 106 is a SgNB, the UE 102 can be in EUTRA-NR DC (EN-DC) with the MeNB and the SgNB.
[0032] In some cases, an MeNB or an SeNB is implemented as an ng-eNB rather than an eNB. When the base station 104 is a Master ng-eNB (Mng-eNB) and the base station 106 is a SgNB, the UE 102 can be in next generation (NG) EUTRA-NR DC (NGEN-DC) with the Mng-eNB and the SgNB. When the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is an SgNB, the UE 102 may be in NR-NR DC (NR-DC) with the MgNB and the SgNB. When the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is a Secondary ng-eNB (Sng-eNB), the UE 102 may be in NR-EUTRA DC (NE-DC) with the MgNB and the Sng-eNB.
[0033] In the scenarios where the UE 102 hands over from the base station 104 to the base station 106, the base stations 104 and 106 operate as the source base station (S-BS) and a target base station (T-BS), respectively. The UE 102 can operate in DC with the base station 104 and an additional base station (not shown in Fig. 1A) for example prior to the handover. The UE 102 can continue to operate in DC with the base station 106 and the additional base station or operate in single connectivity (SC) with the base station 106, after completing the handover. The base stations 104 and 106 in this case operate as a source MN (S-MN) and a target MN (T-MN), respectively.
[0034] A core network (CN) 110 can be an evolved packet core (EPC) 111 or a fifthgeneration core (5GC) 160, both of which are depicted in Fig. 1A. The base station 104 can be an eNB supporting an SI interface for communicating with the EPC 111, an ng-eNB supporting an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160, or a gNB that supports an NR radio interface as well as an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160. To directly exchange messages with each other during the scenarios discussed below, the base stations 104 and 106 can support an X2 or Xn interface. Among other components, the EPC 111 can include a Serving Gateway (SGW) 112, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) 114, and a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) 1 16. The SGW 112 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc., and the MME 114 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions. The PGW 116 provides connectivity from the UE to one or more external packet data networks, e.g.. an Internet network and/or an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. The 5GC 160 includes a User Plane Function (UPF) 162 and an Access and Mobility Management (AMF) 164, and/or Session Management Function (SMF) 166. The UPF 162 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc., the AMF 164 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions, and the SMF 166 is configured to manage PDU sessions.
[0035] As illustrated in Fig. 1A, the base station 104 supports cell 124A, and the base station 106 supports a cell 126. The cells 124 A and 126 can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, where one of the base stations 104 and 106 is an MN and the other is an SN. The base station 104 can support additional cell(s) such as cells 124B and 124C, and the base station 106 can support additional cell(s) (not shown in Fig. 1A). The cells 124A. 124B, and 124C can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in earner aggregation (CA) with the base station 104. The base station 104 can operate the cells 124A, 124B, and 124C via one or more transmit and receive points (TRPs). More particularly, when the UE 102 is in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, one of the base stations 104 and 106 operates as an MeNB, an Mng-eNB or an MgNB, and the other operates as an SgNB or an Sng-eNB.
[0036] In general, the wireless communication network 100 can include any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. More particularly, the EPC 111 or the 5GC 160 can be connected to any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. Although the examples below refer specifically to specific CN types (EPC, 5GC) and RAT types (5GNR and EUTRA), in general the techniques of this disclosure also can apply to other suitable radio access and/or core network technologies such as sixth generation (6G) radio access and/or 6G core network or 5G NR-6G DC.
[0037] With continued reference to Fig. 1A. the base station 104 is equipped with processing hardware 130 that can include one or more general-purpose processors (e.g., CPUs) and anon- transitory computer-readable memory storing instructions that the one or more general-purpose processors execute. Additionally or alternatively, the processing hardware 130 can include special-purpose processing units. The processing hardware 130 can include a PHY controller 132 configured to transmit data and control signal on physical downlink (DL) channels and DL reference signals with one or more user devices (e g. UE 102) via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs. The PHY controller 132 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical uplink (UL) channels and/or UL reference signals with the one or more user devices via one or more cells (e.g.. the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs. The processing hardware 130 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 134 configured to perform MAC functions with one or more user devices. The MAC functions include a random access (RA) procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and/or communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the one or more user devices. The MAC functions include lower triggered mobility7 (LTM) related functions as described below. The processing hardware 130 can further include an RRC controller 136 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack. For example, the RRC controller 132 may be configured to support RRC messaging associated with handover procedures, and/or to support the necessary7 operations when the base station 104 operates as an MN relative to an SN or as an SN relative to an MN. The base station 106 can include processing hardware 140 that is similar to processing hardware 130. In particular, components 142. 144, and 146 can be similar to the components 132, 134, and 136, respectively.
[0038] The UE 102 is equipped with processing hardware 150 that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. The PHY controller 152 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical DL channels and/or DL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C, and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs. The PHY controller 152 is also configured to transmit data and control signal on physical UL channels and/or UL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124 A, 124B, 124C, and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs. The processing hardware 150 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 154 configured to perform MAC functions with base station 104 or 106. For example, the MAC functions include a random access procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the base station 104 or 106. In another example, the MAC functions include LTM related functions as described below. The processing hardware 150 can further include an RRC controller 156 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
[0039] In operation, the UE 102 in DC can use a radio bearer (e g., a DRB or an SRB) that at different times terminates at the MN 104 or the SN 106. The UE 102 can apply one or more security7 keys when communicating on the radio bearer, in the uplink (UL) (from the UE 102 to a base station) and/or downlink (from a base station to the UE 102) direction. [0040] Fig. IB depicts an example distributed implementation of a base station such as the base station 104 or 106. The base station in this implementation can include a central unit (CU) 172 and one or more distributed units (DUs) 174. The CU 172 is equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non- transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. In one example, the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 130. In another example, the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 140. The processing hardware 140 in an example implementation includes an SN RRC controller 142 configured to manage or control one or more RRC configurations and/or RRC procedures when the base station 106 operates as an SN. The DU 174 is also equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. In some examples, the processing hardware in an example implementation includes a medium access control (MAC) controller configured to manage or control one or more MAC operations or procedures (e.g., a random access procedure) and a radio link control (RLC) controller configured to manage or control one or more RLC operations or procedures when the base station 106 operates as an MN or an SN. The process hardware may include further a physical layer controller configured to manage or control one or more physical layer operations or procedures.
[0041] Fig. 2 A illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 200 according to which the UE 102 can communicate with an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB (e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106).
[0042] In the example stack 200, a physical layer (PHY) 202A of EUTRA provides transport channels to the EUTRA MAC sublayer 204A, which in turn provides logical channels to the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206 A. The EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A in turn provides RLC channels to an EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and, in some cases, to an NR PDCP sublayer 210. Similarly, the NR PHY 202B provides transport channels to the NR MAC sublayer 204B, which in turn provides logical channels to the NR RLC sublayer 206B. The NR RLC sublayer 206B in turn provides data transfer services to the NR PDCP sublayer 210. The NR PDCP sublayer 210 in turn can provide data transfer services to Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) 212 or a radio resource control (RRC) sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A). The UE 102, in some implementations, supports both the EUTRA and the NR stack as shown in Fig. 2A, to support handover between EUTRA and NR base stations and/or to support DC over EUTRA and NR interfaces. Further, as illustrated in Fig. 2A, the UE 102 can support layering ofNR PDCP 210 over EUTRA RLC 206 A, and SDAP sublayer 212 over the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
[0043] The EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 receive packets (e.g., from an Internet Protocol (IP) layer, layered directly or indirectly over the PDCP layer 208 or 210) that can be referred to as service data units (SDUs), and output packets (e.g., to the RLC layer 206A or 206B) that can be referred to as protocol data units (PDUs). Except where the difference between SDUs and PDUs is relevant, this disclosure for simplicity refers to both SDUs and PDUs as “packets.”
[0044] On a control plane, the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide signaling radio bearers (SRBs) or RRC sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A) to exchange RRC messages or non-access-stratum (NAS) messages, for example. On a user plane, the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) to support data exchange. Data exchanged on the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can be SDAP PDUs, Internet Protocol (IP) packets or Ethernet packets.
[0045] Fig. 2B illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 250, which the UE 102 can communicate with a DU (e.g., DU 174) and a CU (e.g., CU 172). The radio protocol stack 200 is functionally split as shown by the radio protocol stack 250 in Fig. 2B. The CU at any of the base stations 104 or 106 can hold all the control and upper layer functionalities (e.g., RRC 214, SDAP 212, NR PDCP 210), while the lower layer operations (e.g., NR RLC 206B. NR MAC 204B, and NR PHY 202B) are delegated to the DU. To support connection to a 5GC, NR PDCP 210 provides SRBs to RRC 214, and NR PDCP 210 provides DRBs to SDAP 212 and SRBs to RRC 214.
[0046] Next, several example scenarios in which the base station operating in the system of Fig. 1A transmits a configuration to the UE 102 and later activates a configuration for communication between the UE 102 and base station. Generally speaking, events in Figs. 3- 7B that are similar are labeled with similar reference numbers (e.g, event 316 is similar to event 416 of Figs 4A and 4B, event 516 of Fig. 5A, event 517 of Fig. 5B, event 616 of Fig. 6A, event 617 of Fig. 6B. event 716 of Fig. 7A, and event 717 of Fig. 7B), with differences discussed below where appropriate. With the exception of the differences shown in the figures and discussed below, any of the alternative implementations discussed with respect to a particular event (e.g., for messaging and processing) may apply to events labeled with similar reference numbers in other figures.
[0047] Referring first to Fig. 3. in a scenario 300, the base station 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174 and the DU 174 operates the cell 124A. The UE 102 initially communicates 302 with the DU 174 on the cell 124A using a serving DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174. e.g., using a serving CU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 is a serving DU that is communicating with the UE 102. In some implementations, the UE 102 in carrier aggregation (CA) communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., cell 124D not shown in Fig. 1 A) using the serv ing DU configuration. The DU 174 operates the other cell(s). The cell 124A and/or the other cell(s) are serving cell(s) for the UE 102. In other implementations, the UE 102 in communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A only. In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the cell 124A can be a PCell. In such cases, the other cell(s) include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or a SCell. In other implementations, the cell 124A can be a SCell. and one of the other cell(s) is a PCell. In such cases, the rest includes SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or a SCell. In the following description, the base station 104 can be the DU 174, the CU 172 or the DU 174 and CU 172.
[0048] In the event 302, the UE 102 can transmit UL PDUs and/or UL control signals to the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the base station 104 via radio bearers which can include SRBs and/or DRB(s). The base station 104 can configure the radio bearers to the UE 102. In some implementations, UL control signals include UL control information, channel state information, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements (ACKs), HARQ negative ACKs, scheduling request(s) and/or sounding reference signal(s). Similarly, the UE 102 can receive DL PDUs and/or DL control signals from the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the DL control signals include downlink control information (DCIs) and reference signals (e.g., synchronization signal block, channel state information reference signal(s) (CSI-RS(s)), and/or tracking reference signal(s)). The base station 104 can transmit the DCIs on physical downlink control channel(s) (PDCCH(s)) monitored by the UE 102, on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
[0049] In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes at least one first non-LTM TCI state configuration for the serving cell(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 can transmit these configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the CU 172. The CU 172 generates one or more messages (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) and transmits the one or more messages to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters and/or the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 directly. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In other implementations, the serving DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE. In some implementations, the serving CU configuration includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters. In some implementations, the serving CU configuration includes a MeasConfiig IE and/or a RadioBearerConftg IE defined in 3 GPP TS 38.331 or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConftg IE. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting. In other implementations, the serving CU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for CSI measurement and reporting. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives the serving CU configuration or the configuration parameters in the serving CU configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174. In other implementations, the UE 102 receives a portion of the serving CU configuration and/or a portion of the serving DU configuration from a base station other than the base station 104 and the remaining portion of these configuration parameters from the base station 104.
[0050] In some implementations, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicates with each other using the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s), e.g., in the events 302, 318, 320, 324, 325, 330, and/or 331. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits at least one first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate some of the first non- LTM TCI state configuration(s). The UE 102 activates the some of the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) in response to the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 indicates deactivation of some of the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) in some of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s). The UE 102 and DU 174 communicates with each other using the activated non-LTM TCI state configuration(s), e.g., in the events 302, 318, 320, 324, 325, 330, and/or 331.
[0051] In some implementations, each of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE. The MAC CE(s) may include one or more TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CEs, one or more TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CEs, one or more PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced PUCCH Spatial Relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, one or more Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE- specific PDCCH MAC CEs, one or more PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation for multiple TRP PUCCH repetition MAC CEs, and/or one or more Unified TCI States Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs.
[0052] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a serving cell ID (e.g., a serving cell index) in each of the first non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s). Each of the serving cell ID(s) indicates a respective serving cell of the serving cell(s). In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes the serving cell ID(s) and configures association(s) between the serving cell ID(s) and the first non-LTM TCI state configuration(s).
[0053] While communicating with the base station 104, the UE 102 transmits 304 at least one measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, the at least one measurement report includes Layer 1 (LI) measurement report(s) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurement report(s) for at least one serving cell of the UE 102 and/or at least one non-serving cell. For each of the L3 measurement report(s), the DU 174 transmits 306 a DU-to-CU message including the L3 measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message(s) of the event 306 is/are Fl application protocol (F1AP) message(s) (e.g., UL RRC Message Transfer message(s)). In some implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit or refrains from transmitting the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172. The at least one serving cell includes the cell 124A and/or other cell(s), and the at least one non-serving cell includes the cell 124B and/or cell 124C. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration or the serving CU configuration includes at least one measurement configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302. In accordance with the at least one measurement configuration, the UE 102 performs measurements and transmits 304 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)) and/or LI measurement configuration(s). The LI measurement configuration(s) (e.g., CSI-MeasConfig IE(s)) can include LI measurement resource configuration(s) and/or LI measurement reporting configuration(s). The LI measurement resource configuration(s) can configure reference signal(s) and/or resources of the reference signal(s) for the UE 102 to measure and obtain LI measurement results. In some implementations, the reference signal(s) includes CSI-RS(s) and/or Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Block(s) (SSB(s)). For example, the LI measurement resource configuration(s) is/are CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s). In another example, the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) configures way(s) the UE 102 uses to transmit LI measurement results/reports. For example, the LI measurement report configuration(s) is/are CSI-ReportConflg IE(s). For example, The UE 102 transmits the L3 measurement report(s) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 in accordance with the L3 measurement configuration(s). The UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the LI measurement configuration(s) or LI measurement reporting configuration(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
[0054] In some implementations, the LI measurement configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for a lower layer triggered mobility (LTM). In some implementations, the LI measurement resource configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for the LTM. In some implementations, the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 for the LTM. In some implementations, each of the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) can include a trigger event configuration configuring a trigger event to trigger the UE 102 to transmit a LI measurement report. If the UE 102 detects the trigger event, the UE 102 transmits a LI measurement report to the DU 174.
[0055] In some implementations, (each of) the LI measurement report(s) can include at least one LI measurement result. In some implementations, the at least LI measurement result includes at least one LI -reference signal received power (Ll-RSRP) value and/or at least one LI- Signal to Interference Noise Ratio (Ll-SINR) value. For each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, in some implementations. That is, the UE 102 transmits the each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUCCH to the DU 174. In other implementations, for each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. That is, the UE 102 transmits the each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the DU 174. In yet other implementations, the UE 102 transmits a portion of the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) and the rest of the LI measurement report(s) on physical UL shared channel(s) (PUSCH(s)) to the DU 174. That is, for each of the portion of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, and for each of the rest of the LI measurement report(s). the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, each of the LI measurement report(s) is a part of CSI (i.e., a CSI component) or CSI. In some implementations, the UE 102 can include other CSI component(s) in (each of) the PUCCH transmission(s) and/or PUSCH transmission(s) described above. In one implementation, the other CSI component(s) include such as a channel quality indicator (CQI). a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI). a CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI), a SSB Resource Indicator (SSBRI), a Layer Indicator (LI), and/or a Rank Indicator (RI). In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
[0056] In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement report(s) can include at least one L3 measurement result. In some implementations, the at least one L3 measurement result includes at least one RSRP (value) and/or at least one SINR (value). In one implementation, the UE 102 transmits each of the L3 measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the CU 172 via the DU 174. In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement report(s) can be a RRC message (e.g., MeasurementReport message). In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement configuration(s) includes a particular measurement identity (e.g., measld) and each of the L3 measurement report(s) includes a particular measurement identity7 in a particular L3 measurement configuration. When the CU 172 receives aL3 measurement report including a measurement identity- and a L3 measurement result from the UE 102 via the DU 174, the CU 172 can determine that the L3 measurement report is associated to a L3 measurement configuration identified by the measurement identity7.
[0057] In some alternative implementations, for each of the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)), the UE 102 transmits a MAC control element (CE) including the measurement report to the DU 174 in the event 304. To transmit the MAC CE(s), the UE 102 generate one or more MAC PDUs each including one or more of the MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in the event 304.
[0058] In some implementations, the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals in accordance with the at least one measurement configuration. The one or more reference signals can include one or more Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Blocks (SSBs) and/or one or more CSLRSs. The UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements. The DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., the cell 124B, the cell 124C and/or cell(s) not shown in Fig. 1 A). [0059] After (e.g., in response to) receiving one or some of the at least one measurement report from the UE 102, the base station 104 (i.e., the CU 172 or DU 174) determines to prepare a first cell (e.g., the cell 124B) for LTM for the UE 102. In some implementations, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell could be used by the base station 104 to communicate with the UE 102. In some implementations, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell qualifies to be a candidate cell that could be used for communication with the UE 102. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A, and/or is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A by a first predetermined threshold, the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. In other implementations, if the LI measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than signal strength and/or quality of the cell 124 A, and/or is better than signal strength and/or quality of the cell 124 A by a first predetermined threshold, the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. Alternatively, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measure report is received from the UE 102 or not.
[0060] In the case that the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for LTM, the CU 172 transmits 308 a first CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes a cell identity (ID) 1 of the first cell in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM for the UE 102. For example, the cell ID 1 is cell global identity (CGI). In another example, the cell ID is a portion of the CGI. In yet another example, the cell ID is a physical cell ID (PCI). In some implementations, the CU 172 includes a LTM indicator in the first CU-to-DU message to indicate the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM. In some implementations, the LTM indicator is a LTM Information to be Setup IE or LTM Information to be Modified IE. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM indicator in LTM Information to be Setup IE and includes the LTM Information to be Setup IE in the first CU-to-DU message. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM indicator in a LTM Information to be Modified IE and includes the LTM Information to be Modified IE in the first CU-to-DU message. In response to the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 generates a first LTM DU configuration (referred to herein after as LTM DU configuration 1) for the UE 102, which configures the first cell for LTM. The DU 174 then transmits 310 a first DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration 1 to the CU 172 in response to the first CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, the DU 174 can include the cell ID 1 together with the LTM DU configuration 1 in an IE of the first DU-to-CU message to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is associated with the first cell (i.e., the cell ID 1). In the case that the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell, the DU 174 initiates transmission of the first DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 instead of in response to a CU-to-DU message received from the CU 172.
[0061] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the cell ID of the first cell associated with the LTM DU configuration 1 to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell. The CU 172 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell. In some scenarios and implementations, the CU 172 can include additional cell ID(s) (e.g., cell ID(s) 2, ... , N) in the first CU-to-DU message to prepare additional cell(s) (e.g., cell(s) 2, ... , N) for LTM for the UE 102, and the DU 174 includes additional LTM DU configuration(s) (e.g., LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N) each configuring a particular cell of the additional cell(s), as described below. In such cases, the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the additional cell ID(s) respectively associated with the additional LTM DU configuration(s) to indicate that which LTM DU configuration is associated to which cell (ID). The cell(s) 1 and/or 2, .. . , N are candidate cell(s).
[0062] In some implementations, the CU 172 does not include a (reference) LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N (i.e., nonreference LTM DU configuration(s)) based on the reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to- DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, and/or 2, . .. , N which are delta configuration(s) to augment the reference LTM DU configuration. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a first reference LTM DU configuration) in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a second reference LTM DU configuration) replacing the first reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2. ... , N based on the second reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the second reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message. [0063] In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and/or reporting.
[0064] In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving DU configuration and the rest of the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the rest of the serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as the serving DU configuration.
[0065] After receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., an RRCReconflguration message) including the LTM DU configuration 1 and transmits 316 a second CU-to-DU message including the RRC reconfiguration message to the DU 174. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, the CU 172 does not include a/the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In some implementations, if the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration to the UE 102 during the event 302, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, if the CU 172 receives the reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Otherwise, if the CU 172 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0066] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first container (e.g., a field/IE) and includes the first container (e.g., LTM configuration 1) in the RRC reconfiguration message ofthe events 316 and 318. In such cases, the CU 172 generates the first container. The first container is to indicate the UE 102 not to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 immediately. In some scenarios or implementations, the UE 102 receives a RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 318) including a configuration (e.g.. the LTM DU configuration 1). If the configuration is included in the first container, the UE 102 refrains from immediately applying the configuration. Otherwise, if the configuration is not included in the first container, the UE 102 can apply the configuration immediately. In some implementations, the first container includes or is a first addition or modification list (e.g., Itm-CandidateToAddModList field or LTM-CandidateToAddModList IE). The CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first element (referred to herein after as element 1) of the first addition or modification list. In some implementations, the CU 172 generates an RRC message (e g., RRC Recconfiguration message) including the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1, and includes the RRC message in the element 1. In some implementations, the element 1 is an addition or modification IE (e.g., LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE. LTM-Candidate IE, LTM- CandidateToAddMod IE or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE). When the UE 102 receives the first addition or modification list, the UE 102 can store the first addition or modification list, e.g., in a variable in its random access memory (RAM). In other alternative implementations, the DU 174 generates the first container and includes the first container in the first DU-to-CU message. In yet other alternative implementations, the DU 174 generates the element 1 and includes the element 1 in the first DU-to-CU message.
[0067] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes a LTM CU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the first container or the element 1, where the LTM CU configuration 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration 1. To associate the LTM CU configuration 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1 , the CU 172 can include the LTM CU configuration 1 and the LTM DU configuration in the element 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the second container, where the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. To associate the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N , the CU 172 can include the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configured on(s) in the element(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the element(s) 2. .... N, the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . . . . N. respectively. Alternatively, the CU 172 does not include, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, LTM CU configuration(s) for some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . .. , N.
[0068] After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the DU 174 transmits 318 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102. In response, the UE 102 transmits 320 a RRC reconfiguration complete message (e.g., an RRCReconfigurationComplete message) to the DU 174, which in turn transmits 322 a second DU-to-CU message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU 172 performs security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the RRC reconfiguration message. For example, the CU 172 generates a message authentication code for integrity’ (MAC-I) for the RRC reconfiguration message, encrypts the RRC reconfiguration message and the MAC-I to obtain an encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and an encrypted MAC-I, and transmits a PDCP PDU including the encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and encry pted MAC-I to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the events 316 and 318. When the UE 102 receives the PDCP PDU from the CU 172 via the DU 174 (i.e., events 316 and 318), the UE 102 decrypts the encrypted RRC reconfiguration and encrypted MAC-I to obtain the RRC reconfiguration message and MAC-I and verifies whether the MAC-I is valid. If the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is invalid, the UE 102 discards or ignores the RRC reconfiguration message. In some implementations, the UE 102 can perform a RRC connection reestablishment procedure in response to the invalid MAC-I. Otherwise, if the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is valid, the UE 102 can process the RRC reconfiguration. The UE 102 refrains from applying (i.e., executing) the LTM DU configuration 1 until receiving a LTM command activating the LTM DU configuration 1 as described for events 330, 350.
[0069] The events 308 (optional) and 310 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM preparation procedure 390. The events 316, 318, 320. 322 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM configuration delivery procedure 394.
[0070] In some implementations, the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Setup Request message, and the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Setup Response message. In some implementations, the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message, and the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or UE Context Modification Required message. In the case of the UE Context Modification Required message, the CU 172 can transmit a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to UE Context Modification Required message. In some implementations, the second CU-to-DU message is aDL RRC Message Transfer message. In other implementations, the second CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message. In some implementations, the second DU-to-CU message is a UL RRC Message Transfer message. In other implementations, the second DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message. [0071] In some implementations, the CU 172 can include a reference LTM CU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 might generate the LTM CU configuration 1 (i.e., non-reference LTM CU configuration) as a delta configuration to augment the reference LTM CU configuration. Similarly, the CU 172 might generate some or all of the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ... , N as delta configuration(s) to augment the reference LTM CU configuration. Alternatively, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and does not include a non-reference LTM CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and/or the reference LTM DU configuration in an additional container (e.g., reference LTM configuration) and include the additional container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0072] In some implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving CU configuration and the rest of the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the rest of the serving CU configuration. In yet other implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as the serving LTM CU configuration.
[0073] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, a first LTM ID (referred to herein after as ID 1) for identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first container or element 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns the ID 1.
[0074] In some implementations, the CU 172 can transmit the ID 1 to the DU 174, and the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the cell ID 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message. In other implementations, after receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 transmits 312 a third CU-to-DU message including the ID 1 to the DU 174 instead of including the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration 1 and the ID 1 and indicate the association between the ID 1 and LTM DU configuration 1. Thus, the DU 174 can directly associate the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 can include the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 (i.e., the first LTM ID) and indicate the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1. Thus, the DU 174 can associate the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1, based on the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 and the association between the cell ID 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1. In yet other implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration 1, the cell ID 1 and/or the ID 1 and indicate the association between the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the cell ID 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 can transmit 314 a third DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 in response to the third CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, the third CU-to-DU message and third DU-to-CU message are UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message. In some implementations, the CU 172 can include the ID 1, the cell ID 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration 1 in the second CU-to-DU message as described above. Thus, the third CU-to-DU message can be omitted. In some implementations, the third DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message. In such cases, the CU 172 transmits a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to the UE Context Modification Required message.
[0075] In some implementations, the events 312 (optional) and/or 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM ID assignment procedure 392.
[0076] In the case that the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 can include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container or element 1. Alternatively, the DU 174 does not include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container and/or element 1.
[0077] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container. For example, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 and outside the first container. For example, the CU 172 generates a third container (e.g., a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the third container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container. For example, the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 generates a fourth container (e.g.. a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the fourth container in the first DU-to-CU message 310. In such cases, the CU 172 includes the fourth container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 retrieves the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 from the fourth container and includes the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 as described above. [0078] In some implementations, neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM CU configuration.
[0079] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a plurality of configuration parameters for the UE 102 to communicate with the DU 174 on the first cell. In some implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters include physical layer configuration parameters (e.g.. PhysicalCellGroupConflg IE). MAC layer configuration parameters (e.g., MAC-CellGroupConfig IE) and/or RLC configuration parameters (e.g., RLC- BearerConfig IE(s)). In some further implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters include a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 is CellGroupConflg IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConflg IE.
[0080] In some implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters. In some implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes aMeasConftg lE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConflg IE and/ or RadioBearerConfig IE. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes LI measurement configuration 1 (e.g., a CSI-MeasConfig IE) and/or at least one transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration. In other implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes the LI measurement configuration and/or the TCI state configuration(s) 1. In some implementations, the LI measurement configuration includes at least one reference signal (RS) resource configuration 1 and/or at least one report configuration 1. In some implementations, the RS resource configuration(s) 1 configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell 1. The RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s). The RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI- RS resource(s). In some implementations, each of the RS resource configuration(s) 1 includes a RS resource configuration ID. In some implementations, the RS resource configuration(s) 1 is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s). In some implementations, the report configuration(s) 1 configures one or more UL resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results. In some implementations, each of the report configuration(s) 1 includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the RS resource configuration(s) 1. In some implementations, each of the TCI state configuration(s) 1 configures a TCI state that associates one or two DL RSs with a corresponding quasicolocation (QCL) type. The DL RS(s) are associated with the cell 1.
[0081] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the LI measurement configuration 1 and/or the TCI state configuration(s) 1 in a serving DU configuration 1 (e.g., non-LTM DU configuration). In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the serving DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits an additional DU-to-CU message including the serving DU configuration to the CU 172. In some implementations, the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the serving DU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. In other implementations, the CU 172 transmits another RRC reconfiguration message including the serving DU configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
[0082] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the cell 124 A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1 . Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the random access configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration, as described below. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the random access configuration or indicates the UE 102 to skip a random access procedure in LTM, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the random access configuration.
[0083] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes random access configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the reference LTM DU configuration regardless of whether the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized or not. The UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration parameters, as described below. In some implementations, the random access configuration parameters configure physical random access channel (PRACH) resources, an association between SSB and PRACH resources, and/or one or more PRACH occasions.
[0084] In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include, in the LTM DU configuration 1, a first indication configuring the UE 102 not to perform a random access procedure on the first cell. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the first indication, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in accordance with or in response to the first indication. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the first indication, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in accordance with the random access configuration in the event 332, in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the first indication, as described below.
[0085] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a LTM cell switch information in the first LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the random access configuration (parameters) in the LTM cell switch information (e.g., Itm-CellSwitchlnfo field or LTM-CellSwitchlnfo IE). In some implementations, if the cell 124 A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124 A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 as described below, in response to or in accordance with the reconfiguration with sync configuration. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a cell ID (i.e., cell ID 1) of cell 1 (i.e., the first cell) in the LTM DU configuration 1. In one implementation, the cell ID 1 can be a PCI. In another implementation, the cell ID 1 is a CGI. In some implementations, the cell ID 1 included in the LTM DU configuration 1 is a PCI, while the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message is a CGI. In some further implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 or the first cell. The cell index 1 is not a cell ID. The cell index takes fewer bits than the cell ID. In some implementations, the CU 172 sets the cell index 1 to a value and includes the cell index 1 in the first CU-to-DU message of the event 308.
[0086] In some implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving one or some of the at least one measurement report of the event 304, the base station 104 (i.e., the CU 172 or DU 174) determines to prepare additional cell(s) (i.e.. cell(s) 2. .... N) of the base station 104 for LTM for the UE 102. In one implementation, the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the additional cell(s) could be used by the base station 104 to communicate with the UE 102. The additional cell(s) can include the cell 124C and/or cell(s) other than the cells 124A, 124B and 124C. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of a particular cell of the additional cell(s) is above a respective predetermined threshold and/or is better than the cell 124A, the CU 172 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102. In other implementations, if the LI measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of a particular cell of the additional cell(s) is above a first predetermined threshold and/or is better than the cell 124A, the DU 174 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102. In one implementation, the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cells can be different from the first predetermined threshold. In another implementation, the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cell(s) can be the same as the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the respective predetermined thresholds for the additional cells can be the same or different. Alternatively, the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measurement report is received from the UE 102 or not. [0087] In the case that the CU 172 determines to prepare the additional cell(s), the CU 172 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure (LTM preparation procedure(s)) with the DU 174 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390. In the case that the DU 174 determines to prepare the additional cell(s), the DU 174 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure (LTM preparation procedure(s)) with the CU 172 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
[0088] In some implementations, the CU 172 and DU 174 perform LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . .. , N to prepare the cell(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, similar to the procedure 390. The CU 172 can include the cell ID(s) 2, ... , N in CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, similar to the first CU-to-DU message. In the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .... N, the DU 174 generates LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . .. , N configuring the cell(s) 2, .. . , N and includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N in DU- to-CU message(s) 2, . .. , N, respectively, as described for the LTM DU configuration 1. In the case that the DU 174 receives the CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ... , N, the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, ... , N responds to the CU-to-DU message(s) 2. ... . N, respectively . ”N" is an integer and larger than one. For example, £'N” is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 14, 15 or 16. In another example, the maximum number of “N” is 4, 8, 16 or 32. Examples and implementations of the LTM DU configuration 1 can apply to the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N.
[0089] In other implementations, the CU 172 and DU 174 performs a single LTM preparation procedure (i. e. , the LTM preparation procedure 390) to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2. . .. , N. In such cases, the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , 2, .. . , N for the cell(s)
1, 2, ... , N, respectively in the first DU-to-CU message. In the first DU-to-CU message, the DU 174 can include the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ... . N respectively associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. 2, ... , N to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ... , N are configured for the cell ID(s) 1, 2, . . . , N, respectively. In the case that the CU 172 determines to perform the LTM preparation procedure 390, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, . . . , N in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively, for LTM.
[0090] After receiving the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. .... N from the DU 174, the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 can include the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N in element(s)
2, ... , N, respectively, and includes the element(s) 2, ... , N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message. LTM ID(s) (i.e., ID(s) 2, ... , N) for identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, N in the first container. For example, the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, .... N and LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the element(s) 2, . .. , N in the first addition or modification list.
[0091] In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns the ID(s) 2, ... , N for the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives the ID(s) 2, ... , N from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 receives from the DU 174 the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, .. . , N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively.
[0092] In some implementations, the CU 172 can perform a LTM ID assignment procedure with the DU 174 for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, similar to the procedure 392. In other implementations, the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicate the association between the ID(s) 2, . . . , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively. Thus, the DU 174 can associate the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N with the ID(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 can include the cell ID(s) 2. . . . . N and the ID(s) 2, . .. , N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicate the association between the cell ID(s) 2, . . . , N and the ID(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. Thus, the DU 174 can associate the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N with the ID(s) 2, .. . , N, respectively, based on the association between the cell ID(s) 2, .. . , N and the ID(s) 2, .. . , N and the association between the cell ID(s) 2, . .. , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N. respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, . . . , N, the cell ID(s) 2, .. . , N and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the second CU-to-DU message as described above. Thus, the third CU-to-DU message can be omitted. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, . .. , N in the first CU-to-DU message and indicate the ID(s) 2, ... , N is/are respectively associated with the cell ID(s) 2, ... , N. In one implementation, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . .. , N. Thus, the CU 172 does not include the ID(s) 2, . . . , N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element(s) 2, . . . , N.
[0093] In some alternative implementations, the DU 174 assigns the ID(s) 2, . .. , N. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, .. . , N in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, . .. , N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, . . . ,N. The CU 172 can include the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N. Thus, the CU 172 does not include an ID (e.g., LTM ID) identifying each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element 1.
[0094] In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 can generate a second container including the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N or element(s) 2, . . . , N instead of using the first container. The CU 172 then transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration message including the second container to the UE 102 via the DU 174. similar to the events 316 and 318. In response, the UE 102 transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the events 320 and 322. In some implementations, the second container can be a second addition or modification list (e.g., Itm- ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm- CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM-CandidateConflgToAddModList IE), and each of the element(s) 2, ... , N can be an addition or modification IE (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM-ConfigToAddMod IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddMod IE). When the UE 102 receives the second addition or modification list, the UE 102 can store the second addition or modification list together with the first addition or modification list, e.g., in a variable in its random access memory (RAM).
[0095] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes cell ID(s) 2, ... , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N to identify the cell(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In one implementation, each of the cell ID(s) 2, . . . , N is a PCI. In some further implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . .. . N includes cell index(es) 2 . . . . . N indexing the cell ID(s) 2. .... N or the cell(s) 2, . . . , N, respectively. In the case that the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, . . . , N for LTM in the procedure 390, the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 2, ... , N to different value(s) and include the cell index(es) 2, . . . , N in the first CU-to CU-to-DU message of the event 308. In the case that the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, ... , N in the additional LTM preparation procedure(s), the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 2, . . . , N to different values and include the cell index(es) 2, ... , N in CU-to-DU message(s) of the additional LTM preparation procedure(s). The CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ... , N to different values. In some implementations, the cell ID(s) 1, . . . , N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . .. , N are different from the cell ID(s) 1, .... N in the CU-to-DU message(s) described above.
[0096] In some implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N includes physical configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, RLC configuration parameters and/or LI measurement configuration(s). In some implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N can be a CellGroupConfig IE as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In other implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. . , N include configuration parameters included in a CellGroupConfig IE as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In some further implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) include a particular special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N are CellGroupConfig IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , . . . , N include configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
[0097] In some implementations, the CU 172 can include one or more additional LTM CU configurations in at least one of the element(s) 2, ... , N, the first container or the second container. Each of the additional LTM CU configurations are associated with a particular LTM DU configuration of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N. Examples and implementations of the additional LTM CU configurations are similar to the LTM CU configuration 1.
[0098] In some implementations, the CU 172 determines to release the LTM DU configuration M of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . .. , N (or the element M of the element(s) 1, ... , M). 1 < M < N. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the DU 174 to indicate the UE 102 to release the LTM DU configuration M or element M. In one implementation, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M for releasing the LTM DU configuration M or element M and includes the release list in the RRC reconfiguration message. In response to the RRC reconfiguration message, the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration M or element M and transmits a RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to indicate the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M. To indicate the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M, the CU 172 can include the cell ID M or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the CU-to-DU message. In response, the DU 174 releases the LTM DU configuration M and transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
[0099] In other implementations, the DU 174 determines to release the LTM DU configuration K. In response to the determination, the DU 174 transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 to release the LTM DU configuration K. To indicate the LTM DU configuration K is released, the DU 174 can include the cell ID K or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the DU-to-CU message. 1 < K < N. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K to release the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the release list to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In response, the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits a RRC reconfiguration complete message to the UE 102 via the DU 174. The CU 172 can transmit a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 in response to the DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message and CU-to-DU message are a UE Context Modification Required message and a UE Context Modification Confirm message, respectively.
[0100] After receiving the RRC reconfiguration in the event 318 or transmitting the RRC reconfiguration complete message in the event 320, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the DU 174 may transmit 326 a DU-to-CU message including the at least one measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the at least one measurement report of the event 324 include LI measurement report(s) or L3 measurement repot(s), as described for the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report on PUCCH(s) and/or PUSCH(s) to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In other implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one MAC CE including the at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
[0101] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174 in accordance with at least one measurement configuration. The at least one measurement configuration configures the UE 102 to perform measurements and report measurement results. The CU 172 transmits the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174. For example, the CU 172 can transmit one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the event 302 and/or 316 and/or after the event 306 or 316. The one or more RRC messages may or may not include the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316. In accordance with the at least one measurement configuration, the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals can include one or more SSBs and/or one or more CSI-RSs. The UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements and includes the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result in the at least measurement report of the event 324. The DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A, the cell 1 and/or the cell(s) 2, N. The one or more reference signals can be CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s).
[0102] In some implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)), as described for the event 304. In other implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes or is LI measurement configuration(s), as described above. In yet other implementations, the LI measurement configuration(s) can be CSI-MeasConfig IE(s) defined in 3GPP TS 38.331. The LI measurement configuration(s) can include RS resource configuration(s) and/or report configuration(s). The UE 102 transmits 324 the LI measurement report(s) on UL resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) to the DU 174 in accordance with the report configuration(s). The DU 174 receives the LI measurement report(s) on the UL resources in accordance with the report configuration(s). In some implementations, the report configuration(s) are or are similar to CSI-ReportConflg IE(s). In other implementations, each of the report configuration(s) is a new RRC IE. In some implementations, (each of) the report configuration(s) configures periodically reporting and/or event-triggered reporting of the LI measurement result(s).
[0103] In some implementations, the LI measurement report(s) is/are CSI report(s). In other implementations, the LI measurement report(s) is/are MAC CE(s). In some implementations, each of the measurement report(s) includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values. The UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the RS resource configuration(s) and/or the report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)). The quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
[0104] In yet other implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes new-type measurement configuration(s) (e.g., LTM measurement configuration(s)). The new- type measurement configuration can be newly defined in a 3GPP specification. In some implementations, the new-type measurement configuration(s) includes reference signal resource configuration(s) configuring resources where the DU 174 transmits reference signal(s). For example, the reference signal resource configuration(s) include CSI-RS(s) and/or SSB(s). In one implementation, the reference signal resource configuration(s) is/are CSI- ResourceConfig IE(s). In another implementation, the new-type measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s), as described above. The UE 102 transmits the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). The DU 174 receives the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). In such cases, the measurement report(s) can be LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s) (e.g., LTM measurement report(s)). In some implementations, the new- type measurement configuration includes configuration parameters newly defined in a 3GPP specification.
[0105] After (e.g., in response to) receiving the measurement report(s) in the event 324, the DU 174 generates a first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 (i.e., the first LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 or to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1). The DU 174 then transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124A to the UE 102. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124D to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 can include the ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 , and the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the ID 1.
[0106] In other implementations, the DU 174 can include the cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 in the first LTM command. The UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, based on the cell index 1. Before receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 retrieves the cell index 1 from the LTM DU configuration 1 or element
1, and establishes an association 1 between the cell index 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1. In other words, the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 to obtain the cell index 1. before receiving the first LTM command. Thus, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the cell index 1 and the association 1. Before receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 retrieves the cell index(es)
2, ... , N from the LTM DU configured on(s) or element(s) 2, ... , N and establishes association(s) 2, ... , N between the cell index(es) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In other words, the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, .. . , N to obtain the cell index(es) 2, .. . , N, before receiving the first LTM command.
[0107] In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes cell ID 1 in the first LTM command, where the cell ID 1 identifies the cell 1 . In some implementations, the cell ID 1 included in the first LTM command is the same as the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message. In other implementations, the DU 174 determines the cell ID 1 (e.g., PCI) included in the first LTM command from the cell ID 1 (e.g., CGI) received in the first CU-to-DU message. The UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, based on the cell ID 1. Before receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 retrieves the cell ID 1 from the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, and establishes an association 1 between the cell ID 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1. In other words, the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 to obtain the cell ID 1 , before receiving the first LTM command. Thus, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the cell ID 1 (received in the first LTM command) and the association 1. Before receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 retrieves the cell ID(es) 2, ... , N from the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, ... , N and establishes association(s) 2, ... , N between the cell ID(es) 2, ... , N and the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, ... , N, respectively. In other words, the UE 102 decodes the LTM DU configuration(s) or element(s) 2, .. . , N to obtain the cell ID(es) 2, .. . , N, before receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, the DU 174 has a mapping table to store mappings between the PCI(s) 1. . .. , N and the CGI(s) 1 , . . . , N for the cell(s) 1 , .. . , N, respectively.
[0108] In yet other implementations, the DU 174 can include a bit map in the first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1, instead of the ID 1 or cell index 1. The number of bits in the bit map is larger than or equal to L‘N”. In one implementation, bit 1, ... , N corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, . . . , N, the ID(s) 1, . . . , N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N or the element(s) 1, . . . , N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 1) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1. Thus, the UE 102 can determine the cell index 1, the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit I set to the first value in the bit map. In another implementation, bit 0, ... , N-l corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ... , N, the ID(s) 1, ... , N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N or the element (s) 1, ... , N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 0) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1 the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1. Thus, the UE 102 can determine the cell index 1, the ID 1 LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the bit 0 set to the first value in the bit map. In such implementations, the DU 174 sets the remaining bits in the bit map to a second value to indicate that the rest of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, , N is/are not activated. In some implementations, the first value is one and the second value is zero. In other implementations, the first value is zero and the second value is one. Generally, if the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration L or change a serving cell to the cell L for the UE 102, the DU 174 can set the corresponding bit (e.g., bit L or bit L-l) in the bit map to the first value and set the remaining bits to the second value, where 1 <L <N. In some implementations, the DU 174 sets at most one bit in the bit map to the first value.
[0109] After determining or identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, the UE 102 then applies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM CU configuration, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command.
[0110] In some implementations, the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s)) of the event 324 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell. TRP(s) of the first cell or reference signal(s) transmitted on the first cell. The reference signal(s) can be CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s). The DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, based on the at least one measurement result. In some implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 because, when or if the at least one measurement result is above a second predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the at least one measurement result includes Ll -RSRP value(s), Ll-RSRQ value(s) and/or Ll -SINR value(s). In other implementations, the at least one measurement result includes RSRP value(s), RSRQ value(s) and/or SINR value(s) for the new-type measurement report(s). In some implementations, the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In one implementation, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In this case, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold. In this case, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold. This indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. Thus, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to that signal strength or qualify of the first cell is above the second predetermined threshold for the UE 102. [OHl] In some implementations, the at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) of the events 324 and 326 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell. The CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, because the at least one measurement result indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above a second predetermined threshold. The second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In one implementation, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold. This also indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. Thus, the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above the second predetermined threshold. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits 328 a fourth CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a serving cell change to the cell 1 for the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. In response to the fourth CU- to-DU message, the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102 and optionally transmits a fourth DU-to-CU message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, the DU 174 can determine to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell index 1. In other implementations, the CU 172 can include the cell ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell ID 1. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 can include the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, the DU 174 can determine to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1. In some implementations, the fourth CU-to-DU message and fourth DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively. In other implementations, the fourth CU-to-DU message and/or fourth DU-to-CU message are new interface messages, e.g., Fl application protocol (F1AP) messages defined in 3 GPP TS 38.473. [0112] When or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command 330, the DU 174 might transmit 329 to the CU 172 a DU-to- CU message indicating LTM (being) executed. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message is a LTM Cell Change Notification message. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 or the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 329 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a fast serving cell change (i.e., a LTM serving cell change). The DU can transmit the DU-to-CU message 329 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 330.
[0113] In some implementations, the first LTM command is a MAC CE included in a MAC PDU that the UE 102 receives from the DU 174 in the event 330. The MAC CE can be a new MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321. In one implementation, the DU 174 includes a subheader identifying the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU and the UE 102 identifies the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU in accordance with the subheader. The subheader can include a logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID defined in a 3GPP specification to identify the new MAC CE. For example, the logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID are newly defined in 3GPP TS 38.321. In other implementations, the first LTM command is a DCI that the UE 102 receives on a PDCCH from the DU 174 in the event 330. The DU 174 generates a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the DCI, scrambles the CRC with a first C- RNTI of the UE 102, and transmits the DCI and scrambled CRC on the PDCCH in the event 330. In one implementation, a format of the DCI can be an existing DCI format defined in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.212). In another implementation, the format of the DCI can be a new DCI format defined in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.212).
[0114] In some implementations, the DU 174 does not perform security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the first LTM command. This speeds up processing the first LTM command in the UE 102 because the UE 102 does not perform security check (e.g., decry ption and/or integrity check) on the first LTM command.
[0115] In some implementations, after receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 may transmit 331 an acknowledgement to the DU 174 on the cell 124 A or cell 124D to indicate that the UE 102 receives the first LTM command. In some implementations, the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK. In other implementations, the acknowledgement is a MAC CE. For example, the MAC CE is an existing MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321. In another example, the MAC CE is a new MAC CE defined in 3GPP TS 38.321. In yet other implementations, the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission. [0116] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits 316 the RRC reconfiguration message in response to the L3 measurement report 306 for the first cell. To configure the UE 102 to transmit the L3 measurement report 306, the CU 172 can transmit a first RRC reconfiguration message including the L3 measurement configuration (e.g., aMeasConfig IE) to the UE 102 before the event 306. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command in response to the LI measurement report(s) 324 for the first cell. To configure the UE 102 to transmit the LI or new-type measurement report(s) 324, the CU 172 can transmit a second RRC reconfiguration message including the LI or new-type measurement configuration(s) to the UE 102. In some implementations, the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages can be the same message (i.e., the same instance). In other implementations, the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are different messages. In some implementations, the second RRC reconfiguration message is the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316. In other implementations, the second RRC reconfiguration message is different from the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
[0117] After (e.g.. in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 accesses 332 the first cell. The UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1, the cell ID 1 or the cell index 1 received in the first LTM command and applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the DU 174 on the first cell. In some implementations, the UE 102 disconnects from the cell 124A, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or after transmitting 331 the acknowledgement. In some implementations, the UE 102 stops communicating on the cell 124A after (e g., in response to) receiving 330 the first LTM command or transmitting 331 the acknowledgement. In some implementations, the UE 102 accesses the first cell by performing a random access procedure on the first cell with the DU 174, in response to receiving the first LTM command. In other implementations, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and transmits the first transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to the DU 174, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command.
[0118] In some implementations, the DU 174 configures the access of the UE 102 to the first cell, including whether or not the UE 102 performs a random access procedure, in the LTM DU configuration 1. When receiving the first LTM command (e.g., the first LTM command), the UE 102 determines whether to perform a random access procedure on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure, the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell in the event 332, in order to connect to the first cell. For example, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconflgurationWithSync IE) to configure that the UE 102 performs a random access procedure when the UE 102 receives a LTM command for the first cell. In other implementations, in the LTM DU configuration 1, the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to skip the random access procedure for a LTM serving cell change to the first cell. In such cases, after receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 skips the random access procedure and transmits the first transmission (e.g.. a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to the DU 174 in the event 332. In some implementations, the DU 174 excludes a reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1 to configure the UE 102 skipping a random access procedure for a LTM serving cell change to the first cell.
[0119] In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the reconfiguration with sync configuration or the random access configuration. In such cases, the DU 174 configures whether the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell in a LTM command. Thus, the UE 102 determines whether to perform the random access procedure on the first cell in the event 332 in accordance with the first LTM command. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes, in the first LTM command, an indication (e.g., a field) indicating skipping a random access procedure. In response to the indication or the first LTM command including the indication, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and directly transmits the first transmission (e.g., a PUSCH transmission or a PUCCH transmission) on the first cell to access the first cell. In other implementations, the DU 174 excludes the indication in the first LTM command to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure. In response to the first LTM command excluding the indication, the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell to access the first cell. In some other implementations, the DU 174 includes a timing advance value in the first LTM command to indicate skipping a random access procedure. In response to receiving the timing advance value or the first LTM command including the timing advance value, the UE 102 skips a random access procedure and transmits the first transmission on the first cell to access the first cell, using the timing advance value. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 excludes, in the first LTM command, a timing advance value to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure. In response to the first LTM command excluding a timing advance command, the UE 102 performs a random access procedure on the first cell to access the first cell.
[0120] In some implementations, the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure. In some implementations, the random access procedure is a contention-free random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a contentionbased random access procedure. In cases where the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits a Message 3 including a UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure. The DU 174 transmits a contention resolution message (e.g., a Message 4) to the UE 102 in response to the Message 3. In cases where the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits a Message A including the UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure. The DU 174 transmits a contention resolution message (e g., Message B) to the UE 102 in response to the Message A. In some implementations, when the UE 102 receives the contention resolution message from the DU 174 on the first cell, the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure (i.e., the UE 102 successfully accesses the first cell). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a second C-RNTI and the UE identity is the second C-RNTI of the UE 102. In such implementations, the contention resolution message is aPDCCH transmission addressed to the second C-RNTI. In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include a C-RNTL the UE identity is the first C-RNTI. In such implementations, the contention resolution message is a PDCCH transmission addressed to the first C-RNTI. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the second C-RNTI in the reconfiguration with sync configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the second C-RNTI in the LTM cell switch information.
[0121] In cases where the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a dedicated random access preamble, the random access procedure is a contention free random access procedure. In such cases, the UE 102 transmits the dedicated random access preamble to the DU 174 via the first cell. When the UE 102 receives a random access response including an ID of the dedicated random access preamble from the DU 174 on the first cell, the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure (i.e., the UE 102 successfully accesses the first cell).
[0122] If the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure on the first cell as described above, the DU 174 will detect that the UE 102 has accessed the first cell when the DU 174 receives Message 3, Message A, or the dedicated preamble in the random access procedure. If the DU 174 configures the UE 102 to skip a random access procedure, the DU 174 will detect that the UE 102 has accessed the first cell when the DU 174 receives the first transmission. [0123] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits the first transmission (e.g., the PUSCH transmission) on the first cell using a UL grant. In some implementations, the first LTM command includes the UL grant. In other implementations, when the UE 102 performs a LTM serving cell change to the first cell in response to the first LTM command, the UE 102 receives a first DCI including the UL grant on a PDCCH on the first cell. In some implementations, the UE 102 attempts to receive the first DCI or the UL grant by monitoring one or more PDCCHs on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1, when the UE 102 switches to the first cell in response to the first LTM command. While monitoring one or more PDCCHs on the first cell, the UE 102 receives the first DCI and a CRC of the first DCI on the PDCCH. In the case that the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the second C-RNT, the UE 102 determines that the first DCI was sent for the UE 102. using the CRC and the second C-RNTI. In the case that the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the second C- RNT, the UE 102 determines that the first DCI was sent for the UE 102, using the CRC and the first C-RNTI.
TCI state configuration
[0124] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits at least one first TCI state configuration (e.g., LTM TCI state configuration) for the first cell to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In some implementations, each of the first TCI state configuration(s) configures a TCI state for the UE 102 to transmit and/or receive data and/or control signal on the first cell. Each TCI state associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type and the DL RS(s) might be associated with a particular cell of the cell(s) 1, ■ N. The DL RS(s) include SSB(s) and/or tracking reference signal(s) (TRS(s)). In some implementations, the CU 172 receives a DU-to-CU message including the first TCI state configuration(s) from the DU 174 and transmits a RRC message including the first TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In further implementations, the DU 174 includes the first TCI state configuration(s) in a serving DU configuration (e.g., CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message is the DU-to-CU message 310 or the DU-to-CU message 314. In other implementations, the DU-to-CU message is a message different from the messages 310, 314. For example, the DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or a UE Context Modification Required message.
[0125] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 in a first interface protocol lE/field in the DU-to-CU message 310, and includes the serving DU configuration in a second interface protocol lE/field in the DU-to-CU message 314. In some implementations, the events 312 (optional) and/or 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM TCI state configuration procedure 392.
[0126] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the serving DU configuration in the RRC message. In some implementations, the CU 172 refrains from including the serving DU configuration in a container for LTM (e g., the first container). In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM ID 1 and the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in an element for LTM, an addition or modification list for LTM, or a container, and the CU 172 includes the element, addition or modification list for LTM, or the container in the RRC message, similar to the element 1, the first addition or modification list, or the first container respectively. In some implementations, the RRC message is the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. In such cases, the CU 172 may include the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the element 1. In other implementations, the RRC reconfiguration is another RRC reconfiguration message (not shown in Fig. 3). In some implementations, the DU 174 also includes the first TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 refrains from including the first TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
[0127] In some implementations, the first interface protocol lE/field is a first Fl AP lE/field and the second interface protocol lE/field is a second Fl AP lE/field. In some implementations, one of the first F1AP lE/field and the second F1AP lE/field is a F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field and the other is not the F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the first F 1 AP lE/field in a DU to CU RRC Information IE in the message 314 and includes the second F1AP lE/field in the DU to CU RRC Information IE in the DU- to-CU message. In other implementations, neither the first Fl AP lE/field nor the second Fl AP IE is a F1AP CellGroupConfig lE/field. In other implementations, the second F1AP lE/field is the DU to CU RRC Information IE and the first F1AP lE/field is a new IE specific for including a LTM DU configuration.
[0128] In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits 325 at least one first LTM TCI states Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate some of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). The UE 102 activates the some of the first LTM TCI state configuration! s) in response to the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 indicates deactivation of some of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in some of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits one or more DL RSs on the candidate cell(s) using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s) or the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). The DL RS(s) may include one or more SSBs and/or one or more TRSs. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives the DL RS(s) using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s). The UE 102 may obtain LI measurement results from the received DL RS(s) and transmits the LI measurement results to the DU 174. The UE 102 may obtain L3 measurement results from the received DL RS(s) and transmits the L3 measurement results to the CU 172 via the DU 174. In some implementations, the DU 174 refrains from using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to communicate with the UE 102 on the serving cell(s). In some implementations, the UE 102 refrains from using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to communicate with the DU 174 on the serving cell(s).
[0129] In some implementations, each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE (e.g., Candidate Cell TCI States Activation/Deactivation command). In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the LTM ID 1 in each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In other implementations, the DU 174 includes a candidate cell index (e.g., the cell index 1) in each of the first LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) to identify the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In such cases, the candidate cell index is different from the LTM ID 1. In some implementations, each of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) may include the candidate cell index. Alternatively, the CU 172 includes the candidate cell index in the RRC message including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). For example, the CU 172 includes the candidate cell index in the element 1. In some alternative implementations, the UE 102 and the DU 174 determines the candidate cell index from the PCI of the first cell. In such cases, the base station 104 does not transmit the candidate cell index to the UE 102.
[0130] In some implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or accessing 332 the first cell, the UE 102 performs DL reception (e.g., monitors one or more PDCCHs) or UL transmission on the first cell using some or all of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the event 336. In other implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or accessing 332 the first cell, the UE 102 performs DL reception (e.g.. monitors one or more PDCCHs) or UL transmission on the first cell without using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the event 336.
[0131] In some implementations, each of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes a TCI state ID identifying the corresponding TCI state configuration. For example, the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ..., L, where L is a positive integer larger than zero. The LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ... , L include TCI state ID(s) 1, ... , L identifying the LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1, ... , L, respectively. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to activate the LTM TCI state configuration 1 to communicate on the first cell. The UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration 1 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command. In some implementations, the UE 102 accesses 332 on the first cell using the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration 1. In other implementations, the UE 102 accesses 332 on the first cell without using the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates 336 on the first cell using the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1.
[0132] In some implementations, in the events 332 and/or 336, the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs, receives one or more DL RSs. receives one or more PDSCH transmissions, and/or transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 detects 332 that the UE 102 accesses the first cell and/or communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, based on the LTM TCI state configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 receives 332 the first transmission and/or 336 the additional transmission(s) from the UE 102 on the first cell, based on the TCI state configuration 1. In other implementations, in the events 332 and/or 336, the DU 174 transmits one or more PDCCHs, one or more PDSCH transmissions, and/or one or more DL RSs, based on the LTM TCI state configuration 1.
[0133] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to activate the TCI state configuration 2 to communicate on the first cell, in addition to the TCI state ID 1. The UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration 1 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 1 in the first LTM command, and activates the LTM TCI state configuration 2 in response to receiving the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 accesses 332 and/or communicates 336 on the first cell using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1 and 2. After (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command or receiving the acknowledgement 331, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336, using the activated LTM TCI state configurations 1 and 2.
[0134] In some implementations, after applying one or more TCI state configurations (e.g., the TCI state configuration(s) 1 and/or 2) indicated in a LTM command (e.g., the first LTM command), the UE 102 takes time (e.g., beam application time or cell switch delay) to acquire TCI state(s) configured in the TCI state configuration(s) (e.g., synchronize and/or receive DL RS(s) configured in the TCI state configuration(s)). The time to acquire TCI state(s) is considered as a switch delay. In such cases, the DU 174 takes the switch delay into account when communicating with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336. For example, after transmitting the first LTM command or receiving the acknowledgement 331, the DU 174 starts to communicate with the UE 102 on the first cell in the events 332 and/or 336 after the switch delay, using the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s) 1 and/or 2.
[0135] In some implementations, the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs. receives one or more DL RSs. and/or receives one or more PDSCH transmissions from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions on the first cell to the DU 174 using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. In such implementations, the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals one or more PDCCHs. one or more DL RSs, and/or one or more PDSCH transmissions to the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions on the first cell from the UE 102 using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI.
[0136] In other implementations, the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and receives one or more PDSCH transmissions from the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI. In such implementations, the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals on one or more PDCCHs on the first cell to the UE 102 using the LTM TCI state configuration 1 and transmits one or more PDSCH transmissions to the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions to the DU 174 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1. In such implementations, the DU 174 receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 1. In other implementations, the UE 102 may transmit the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions to the DU 174 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. In such implementations, the DU 174 receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2.
[0137] In yet other implementations, the UE 102 monitors one or more PDCCHs on the first cell using the TCI state configuration 1 and the TCI state configuration 2, and transmits the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions on the first cell using one of the TCI state configuration 1 and the TCI state configuration 2. In such implementations, the DU 174 transmits one or more control signals on one or more PDCCHs receives the first transmission and/or one or more additional transmissions from the UE 102 on the first cell, using the LTM TCI state configuration 2. Each of the control signal(s) includes a DCI and a scrambled CRC for the DCI.
[0138] In some implementations, the CU 172 receives a CN-to-BS message including a UE capability IE of the UE 102 from a CN (e.g.. the CN 110 or the AMF 164), e.g.. during the event 302. For example, the CN-to-BS message is aNG application protocol (NGAP) message. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives a BS-to-BS message including the UE capability IE from another base station (e.g., the base station 106), e.g., before the event 302. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 receives a UE Capability Information message including the UE capability IE from the UE 102, via the DU 174 or another DU e.g., during the event 302. In some implementations, the DU 174 receives the UE capability IE (e.g., UE- NR-Capability or UE-6G-Capability) of the UE 102 from the CU 172, e.g., during the event 302.
[0139] In some implementations, the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 supports RACH-less LTM. Thus, based on the indication of supporting Random Access Channel-less (RACH-less) LTM, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support RACH-less LTM, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU- to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0140] In other implementations, the UE capability’ IE indicates that the UE supports early timing advance (TA) acquisition. Based on the indication of supporting early TA acquisition, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/ or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0141] In yet other implementations, the UE capability IE indicates that the UE supports a UE-based TA acquisition (e.g., the UE acquires UL synchronization based on reference signal time difference (RSTD) measurements). Based on the indication of supporting the UE-based TA acquisition, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the UE-based TA acquisition, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/or activating a LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0142] In yet other implementations, the UE capability IE indicates that the UE supports LTM TCI states. Based on the indication of supporting LTM TCI states, the DU 174 configures and/or activates one or more LTM TCI state configurations for the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support LTM TCI states, the DU 174 refrains from configuring and/or activating a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. For example, the DU 174 refrains from including a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102 in the DU-to-CU message(s) described above. Accordingly, the CU 712 does not transmit a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 does not include a LTM TCI state configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0143] In yet other implementations, the DU 174 does not determine whether to provide a LTM TCI state configuration for the UE 102. The DU 174 provides the LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the UE 102 to the CU 172 as described above. The CU 172 determines whether to transmit the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. In some implementations, based on the indication of supporting RACH-less LTM, the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support RACH- less LTM, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. [0144] In other implementations, based on the indication of supporting the early TA acquisition, the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the early TA acquisition, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. 318.
[0145] In yet other implementations, based on the indication of supporting the UE-based TA acquisition, the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the UE-based TA acquisition, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0146] In yet other implementations, based on the indication of supporting the LTM TCI states, the CU 172 transmits the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102 as described above. In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support LTM TCI states, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI state configuration to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from transmitting the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) to the UE 102. For example, the CU 172 refrains from including the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
[0147] In some alternative implementations, the DU 174 may not activate or may determine to not activate a (LTM) TCI state configuration in the first LTM command. In such cases, the DU 174 does not include a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Thus, when the UE 102 receives the first LTM command not including a TCI state configuration, the UE 102 refrains from using the first LTM TCI configuration(s) to access and/or communicate on the first cell. [0148] In some implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the RACH-less LTM, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 supports the RACH-less LTM, the DU 174 includes the one or more TCI state IDs (e.g., the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2) in the first LTM command as described above. [0149] In other implementations, if the DU 174 does not configure LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell for the UE 102, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the DU 174 configures one or more LTM TCI state configurations (e.g., the first LTM TCI state configuration(s)), the DU 174 includes one or more LTM TCI state IDs (e.g., the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2) in the first LTM command.
[0150] In yet other implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability indicates that the UE 102 supports the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command as described above.
[0151] In yet other implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support the UE-based TA acquisition, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability indicates that the UE 102 supports the early TA acquisition, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command as described above.
[0152] In yet other implementations, if the UE capability IE indicates that the UE 102 does not support LTM TCI states, the DU 174 does not include or refrains from including a TCI state ID in the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the UE capability indicates that the UE 102 supports LTM TCI states, the DU 174 includes the TCI state ID 1 and/or the TCI state ID 2 in the first LTM command as described above.
[0153] In some implementations, the UE 102 stops using or deactivates the first non-LTM TCI configuration(s) upon receiving the first LTM command.
[0154] After successfully accessing the first cell, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1. In some scenarios or implementations, the UE 102 communicates 336 PUSCH transmissions, PDSCH transmissions, PUCCH transmissions. PDCCH transmissions, and/or sounding reference signal (SRS) transmissions with the DU 174 on the first cell.
[0155] In the case that the UE 102 receives the reference LTM DU configuration as described above, the UE 102 communicates 336 with and the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration.
[0156] In the case that the UE 102 receives neither the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a/the reference LTM CU configuration, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 neither transmits the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a/the reference CU configuration to the UE 102. the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. In the case that the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and (at least a portion of) the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and (at least a portion of) the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1.
[0157] In the case that the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and does not receive the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 instead of the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a/the reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a full configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit a/the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a first indication (e g., afield or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a/the reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit a/the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment to the serving CU configuration, by excluding the first indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, by excluding the second indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0158] In the case that the UE 102 receives the reference LTM CU configuration and does not receive the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration instead of the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 and CU 172 determine that the reference LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration as specified in a 3GPP specification (e.g., 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the reference LTM CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment to the serving CU configuration, by excluding the first indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, by excluding the second indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1 and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0159] In the case that the UE 102 neither receives the reference LTM CU configuration and nor the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. In this case, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. [0160] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes or configures at least one second non- LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell in the LTM DU configuration 1. While communicating with the UE 102 at event 332 or 336, the DU 174 may transmit a second non- LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command on the first cell to the UE 102 to activate the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) and/or deactivate the activated LTM TCI state configuration(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a serving cell index for the first cell in the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command. The DU 174 includes the serving cell index in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the UE 102 stops using or deactivates the (activated) LTM TCI state configuration(s) in response to receiving the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command. In some implementations, the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) is a MAC CE. The MAC CE may be a TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE-specific PDSCH MAC CE, a TCI State Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CEs, a PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CEs, an Enhanced TCI States Activation/Deactivation for UE- specific PDSCH MAC CE, an Enhanced PUCCH Spatial Relation Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, an Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE, an PUCCH spatial relation Activation/Deactivation for multiple TRP PUCCH repetition MAC CE, or an Unified TCI States Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.
[0161] In some implementations, the second non-LTM state configuration(s) may be Rel- 15/16 TCI state configuration(s) (i.e., not a unified joint/DL/UL TCI state). This imply that the BS 104 may configure Rel-15/16 beam indication framework for the first cell. Non- LTM TCI state configurations activated/indicated by the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) may be only applicable to a channel or RS (PDSCH/PDCCH/CSI-RS/PUCCH/SRS). In such implementations, if the UE 102 receives a second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the UE would stop or use the first LTM TCI state for channels or RSs, which are applicable to share/follow/apply unified TCI states. For example, if the UE 102 receives an Enhanced TCI States Indication for UE- specific PDCCH MAC CE, the UE 102 would stop or use the first LTM TCI state for at least one of other channels or RSs applicable to share/follow/apply unified TCI states as well (e.g., PDSCH, PUSCH, PUCCH, CSI-RS or SRS). If the UE 102 receives a second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the UE 102 may deactivate the activated first LTM TCI state configuration(s).
[0162] In some implementations, the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) includes at least one TCI state configured in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In other implementations, TCI state(s) in the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) is/are different from the TCI(s) in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). In some implementations, the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) configure more TCI states than the first LTM TCI state configurations(s). In some other implementations, TCI state(s) in the second non- LTM TCI state configuration(s) is/are identical with the TCI(s) in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s). The BS 104/CU 172/DU 174 may notify the UE 102 in a RRC message or signal, whether first LTM TCI state configuration(s) is identical or different or a subset of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s).
[0163] In some implementations, the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell is a subset of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell. In some implementations, TCI state IDs of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell are not overlapped or identical with those of the second non-LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell. This may imply that when the UE 102 receives the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s), the UE 102 considers/determines that the TCI state ID(s) indicated in the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) refer to the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell or the second non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell. For example, TCI state IDs of the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell ranges from #000 to #007; TCI state IDs of the second non- LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell ranges from #008 to #015. In such example, if the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command indicates TCI state ID #001 , the UE 102 activates the first LTM TCI state configuration identified by TCI state ID #001; if the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command indicates TCI state ID #012. the UE 102 activates the second non-LTM TCI state configuration identified by TCI state ID #012. In some implementations, the UE 102 combines or catenate the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell and the second non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell for non-LTM TCI state activation/indicate purpose. In some implementations, the UE 102 considers or determines the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell as the non- LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell.
[0164] In some implementations, the DU 174 may not include or configure the at least one second non-LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell in the LTM DU configuration 1. In such cases, the UE 102 considers or determines the at least one first TCI state configuration(s) (e.g., LTM TCI state configuration) for the first cell as the non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell. This may imply that when the UE 102 receives the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s), the UE 102 considers/determines that the TCI state ID(s) indicated in the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command(s) refer to the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell. For example, if the second non-LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command indicates TCI state ID #000, the UE 102 activates and/or applies the first TCI state configuration (e.g.. LTM TCI state configuration) identified by TCI state ID #000, and performs non-LTM communication in the first cell.
[0165] In some implementations, if a first LTM TCI state configuration associates or includes a SSB corresponding to QCL type A, the UE 102 refrains from using such TCI state configuration for non-LTM purpose or communication in the first cell. In some implementations, the UE 102 may consider or determine a first LTM TCI state configuration(s) for the first cell as a non-LTM TCI state configurations for the first cell, unless it includes or associates a SSB corresponding to QCL type A.
[0166] In some implementations, when or while the DU 174 communicates 332, 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, the DU 174 refrains from transmitting a LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate a LTM TCI state configuration for the first cell or associated with the LTM ID 1. In other implementations, when or while the DU 174 communicates 332. 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell, the DU 174 transmits a second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command to the UE 102 to activate at least one LTM TCI state configuration in the first LTM TCI state configuration(s) that is/are not activated by the first LTM command. In response to the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the UE 102 activates the LTM TCI state configuration(s) indicated in the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command. In the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, the DU 174 may deactivate the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated in the first LTM command, in some implementations. In such cases, the UE 102 deactivate the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated in the first LTM command, in response. The UE 102 and the DU 174 communicate with each other on the first cell using the LTM TCI state configuration(s) activated by the second LTM TCI States Activation/Deactivation command, as described above.
[0167] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits a RRC message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell to indicate that the UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1. In the case that the UE 102 performs the random access procedure 332, the UE 102 can include the RRC message in the Message 3 or Message A. Alternatively, the UE 102 transmits the RRC message after completing the random access procedure. In the case that the UE 102 skip the random access procedure 332, the UE 102 includes the RRC message in a PUSCH transmission of the at least one PUSCH transmission. In some implementations, if the UE 102 maintains communication on the cell 124A with the base station 104 (i.e., the UE 102 does not disconnect from the cell 124A), the UE 102 can transmit the RRC message to the base station 104 via the cell 124A. When the DU 174 receives the RRC message, the DU 174 transmits the RRC message to the CU 172.
[0168] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from transmitting the RRC message to the base station 104 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command. In such cases, the UE 102 can include or transmit data in the Message 3, Message A or PUSCH transmission as described above. The UE 102 can generate a MAC PDU and/or a RLC PDU including the data and transmits or includes the MAC PDU and/or RLC PDU in the PUSCH transmission. For example, the data can be a PDCP PDU, a SDAP PDU, a LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) PDU, a RRC PDU, and/or a NAS PDU. The RRC PDU includes a UL-DCCH-Message excluding a RRC reconfiguration complete message. The NAS PDU includes a Mobility Management (MM) message or a Session Management (SM) message. The MM message can be a 5G MM message or a 6G MM message, and the SM message can be a 5G SM message or a 6G SM message. When the DU 174 receives the data, the DU 174 transmits the data to the CU 172.
[0169] When the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connects to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 can transmit 334 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., Access Success message) to the CU 172 (e.g., a CP of the CU 172). In some implementations, the DU 174 can include the cell ID 1 of the first cell in the DU-to-CU message of the event 334. The cell ID can be a PCI or a CGI. Thus, the CU 172 determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the DU-to-CU message of the event 334. When the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connect to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 can transmit a DL Data Delivery Status message or frame to the CU 172 (e.g., a UP of the CU 172). In some implementations, when or after the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 329, the CU 172 might stop or suspend transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174 until receiving the DU-to-CU message 334. The CU 172 might do so because the DU 174 cannot buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332. After receiving the DU-to-CU message 334. the CU 172 continues or resumes transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. In other implementations, when the CU 172 receives the DU- to-CU message 329, the CU 172 might continue transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. The CU 172 might do so because the DU 174 can buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332. When or after the DU 174 detects that UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the DU 174 transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
[0170] In some implementations, when determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell, transmitting 330 the first LTM command, or receiving 331 the acknowledgement, the DU 174 can stop communicating with the UE 102 on the cell 124A and/or release resources of the cell 124A configured for the UE 102.
[0171] In some implementations, the DU 174 can generate some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s) to replace the serving DU configuration. If the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 instead of the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes an indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, the DU 174 can include an indication to indicate that the corresponding DU configuration is a full configuration. Each of the indication(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N can be a field or IE (i.e., the same field or IE). In other implementations, the CU 172 can include, in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s). In the case of the second container, the CU 172 can include, in the additional RRC reconfiguration message, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, the CU 172 can include, in the first container, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. . .. , N, the CU 172 can include, in the first container, a particular indication indicating the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In the case of the second container, the CU 172 can include, in the second container, a single indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, the CU 172 can include, in the element 1, includes an indication indicating that the LTM DU configuration l is a full configuration. In each of the element(s) 2, .. . , N, the CU 172 can include an indication indicating that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. The UE 102 can determine that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N is/are full configuration(s) based on the indication(s) above. In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is different from a fullConfig field defined in the current 3GPP specification. In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is a fullConfig field defined in the current 3GPP specification. In the case that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 in the event 336 does not apply the reference LTM DU configuration if received from the base station 104, e.g., in the RRC reconfiguration message 318. In such cases, the DU 174 might not include a/the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
[0172] In other implementations, the DU 174 can generate the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, . . . , N as delta configuration(s) that augment (a portion of) the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ...N based on the reference LTM DU configuration. For example, if the LTM DU configuration 1 is a delta configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 augment (the portion of) the reference LTM DU configuration with the LTM DU configuration 1 . Thus, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and unaugment portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. and/or 2... , N, first container, second container or element(s)
1, ... , N exclude indication(s) indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, and/or 2... , N is/are full configuration(s) to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, . . . , N is/are delta configuration(s). The UE 102 can determine that each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is a delta configuration based on that the indication is excluded in the LTM DU configuration(s) I and/or 2, ... ,N. first container, second container or element(s) 1 and/or
2, ... , N.
[0173] In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, .. . , N, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N are full configuration(s). Correspondingly, if the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, , N as full configuration(s).
[0174] In other implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, .. . , N are delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving DU configuration not augmented by LTM DU configuration 1. Correspondingly, if the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N as delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and the at least a portion of the serving DU configuration.
[0175] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses a UE MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) to communicate with a DU MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) of the DU 174 (e g., the events 302, 304, 318. 320, 324. 330 and/or 331). In some implementations, the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity7, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In some implementations, the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0176] In some implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity7, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the UE MAC entity7 (i.e., UE MAC reset or full UE MAC reset):
• initialize Bj for configured logical channel(s) to zero;
• stop one or more timers;
• consider timeAlignmentTimer(s) as expired, if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1 ); • set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0;
• set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1 ;
• flush Msg3 buffer;
• flush MSGA buffer;
• cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Power Headroom Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered consistent LBT failure;
• cancel, if any, triggered BFR;
• cancel, if any, triggered Sidelink Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Pre-emptive Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Timing Advance Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Recommended bit rate query procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered configured uplink grant confirmation;
• cancel, if any, triggered configured sidelink grant confirmation;
• cancel, if any, triggered Desired Guard Symbol query;
• cancel, if any, triggered Positioning Measurement Gap Activation/Deactivation Request procedure;
• flush soft buffers for DL HARQ process(es);
• for each of the DL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
• release, if any, Temporary C-RNTI;
• reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI COUNTERs and/or LBT COUNTERs).
[0177] In some implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the DU MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset or full DU MAC reset):
• stop one or more timers;
• consider timeAlignmentTimer(s), that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102, as expired, if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1);
• set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0;
• flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); • for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
• reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI COUNTERs and/or LBT COUNTERs)
[0178] Depending on implementations, the UE 102 can determine to partially or fully reset the UE MAC entity. In some implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 fully resets the UE MAC entity (i.e.. a full UE MAC reset). In the full UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs some or all of the actions described above. In other implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 partially resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a partial UE MAC reset). In the partial UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full UE MAC reset.
[0179] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions:
• consider timeAlignmeniTimer(s) of the UE 102 as expired, if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1);
• flush Msg3 buffer;
• flush MSGA buffer;
• release, if any, Temporary C-RNTI;
• reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0180] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions:
• cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Power Headroom Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered consistent LBT failure;
• cancel, if any, triggered BFR;
• cancel, if any, triggered Sidelink Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Pre-emptive Buffer Status Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Timing Advance Reporting procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered Recommended bit rate query procedure;
• cancel, if any, triggered configured uplink grant confirmation;
• cancel, if any, triggered configured sidelink grant confirmation; • cancel, if any, triggered Desired Guard Symbol query;
• cancel, if any, triggered Positioning Measurement Gap Activation/Deactivation Request procedure;
[0181] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions:
• stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers;
• set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0;
• set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1 ;
• flush soft buffers for DL HARQ process(es);
• for each of the DL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
[0182] Depending on implementations, the DU 174 can determine to partially or fully reset the DU MAC entity. In some implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 fully resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a full DU MAC reset). In the full DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs some or all of the actions described above. In other implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity’ as described above, the DU 174 partially resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a partial DU MAC reset). In the partial DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full DU MAC reset.
[0183] In some implementations, the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions in the partial MAC reset:
• consider timeAlignmentTimeris), that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102, as expired, if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1);
• reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI COUNTERs and/or LBT COUNTERs)
[0184] In some implementations, when the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions for the MAC entity (i.e.. DU MAC reset):
• stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers;
• set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0;
• flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); • for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
• reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI COUNTERs and/or LBT COUNTERs)
[0185] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from resetting the UE MAC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. Similarly, the DU 174 refrains from resetting the DU MAC entity after (e.g.. in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the UE MAC entity (not reset). Similarly, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the DU MAC entity (not reset) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0186] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses at least one UE RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) to communicate RLC PDUs with at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304. 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331). In some implementations, the UE 102 reestablishes some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In some implementations, the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0187] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 may or may not include one or more RLC reestablishment indications (e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)) configuring the UE 102 to reestablish some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the a RLC reestablishment indication configuring the UE 102 to reestablish a first UE RLC entity7, of the at least one UE RLC entity, that the UE 102 uses to communicate RLC PDU(s) with the DU 174, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity in response to the RLC reestablishment indication and the first LTM command. In some implementations, the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In other implementations, the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity while or after performing 332 the random access procedure. Otherwise if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity in response to the first LTM command. [0188] In some implementations, when the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the first UE RLC entity:
• discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any;
• stop and reset timer(s), if running;
• reset state variables to initial values.
In some implementations, the state variables and timer(s) are defined in 3GPP TS 38.322.
[0189] Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication for the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In other words, the UE 102 refrains from preforming the actions for reestablishing the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and includes an indication indicating that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 can reestablish the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and the indication indicating that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
[0190] Similarly, the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of at least one DU RLC entity (e.g.. NR RLC 206B) that the DU 174 uses to communicate with the at least one UE RLC entity of the UE 102 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331) in response to the RLC reestablishment indication. In some implementations, the DU 174 reestablishes a first DU RLC entity of the at least one DU RLC entity after transmitting the first LTM command, receiving an acknowledgement for the first LTM command from the UE 102, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In some implementations, the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK. In other implementations, the acknowledgement is a MAC CE. In yet other implementations, the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission. In some implementations, when the base station 104 reestablishes the first DU RLC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the first DU RLC entity7:
• discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any;
• stop and reset timer(s). if running;
• reset state variables to initial values.
In some implementations, the state variables and timer(s) are defined in 3GPP TS 38.322. [0191] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. Similarly, the DU 174 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity (not reestablished). For example, the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity includes the first UE RLC entity and/or a second UE RLC entity. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity (not reestablished) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. For example, the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity includes the first DU RLC entity and/or a second DU RLC entity.
[0192] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses at least one UE PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) to communicate UL PDCP PDUs and/or DL PDCP PDUs with at least one CU PDCP entity (e.g.. PDCP 210) of the CU 172 in the event 302. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command. For example, the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery' procedure for a first UE PDCP entity' of the at least one UE PDCP entity', after or in response to receiving the first LTM command. In the PDCP recovery procedure, the UE 102 may or may not reestablish the first UE PDCP entity. After or in response to performing the PDCP recovery procedure, the UE 102 can retransmit at least a portion of the UL PDCP PDUs to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336. Similarly, the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command. For example, the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery' procedure for a first CU PDCP entity of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command. In some implementations, the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery' procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 334. In other implementations, the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message. In the PDCP recovery procedure, the CU 172 may or may' not reestablish the first CU PDCP entity. After or in response to performing the PDCP recovery' procedure, the CU 172 can retransmit at least a portion of the DL PDCP PDUs to the UE 102 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336. [0193] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. For example, the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity. Similarly, the CU 172 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 340 or after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DL Data Delivery’ Status message. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity (not reestablished). For example, the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity. Similarly, the CU 172 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity (not reestablished) via the DU 174 and the first cell. For example, the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity includes the first CU PDCP entity and/or a second CU PDCP entity'.
[0194] In some implementations, after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell, the CU 172 can transmit 338 a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Request message) to the DU 174 to indicate the DU 174 to stop communicating with the UE 102 and/or to release or suspend resources, of the cell 124 A, configured for the UE 102. In response, the DU 174 can stop communicating on the cell 124A with the UE 102 and/or release or suspend resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102, and transmit 340 a DU-to-CU message (e.g.. a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU-172. The events 338 (optional) and 340 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a resource release or modification procedure 396.
[0195] After or while communicating with the DU 174 on the first cell, events 344, 346, 348, 350. 351, 352, 354 and/or 356 might occur, similar to the events 324, 326. 328, 330, 331, 332, 334 and/or 336, respectively. The UE 102 transmits 344 at least one measurement report to the DU 174. The at least one measurement report includes at least one measurement result for a second cell (i.e., the cell 2). The at least one measurement result indicates that the second cell is suitable for communication with UE 102 and/or the first cell is not suitable for communication with the UE 102. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 and generates a second LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 (i.e., the second LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 2). The DU 174 then transmits 350 the second LTM command to the UE on the first cell to the UE 102. [0196] When or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 or transmit the second LTM command, the DU 174 might transmit 349 to the CU 172 a DU-to- CU message indicating LTM (being) executed. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 2 or the ID 2 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 349 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 2. The DU can transmit the DU-to-CU message 349 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 350.
[0197] The descriptions for the events 324. 326, 328. 330, 331, 332. 334 and/or 336 can be applied to the events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354 and/or 356 with simple changes. For example, “ cell 124A”, “first LTM command”, “first cell”, “ID 1”, “LTM DU configuration 1” and/or “LTM CU configuration 1” are replaced with “first cell”, “second LTM command” and “second cell”, “ID 2”, “LTM DU configuration 2” and/or “LTM CU configuration 2”, respectively.
[0198] The events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM execution procedure 398. The events 304, 306, 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336. 396. 398, 356 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 380.
[0199] Referring next to Fig. 4, in a scenario 400, the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a source DU (S-DU) 174A and a target DU (T-DU) 174B. The S-DU 174A operates the cell 124A and optionally additional cell(s), while the T-DU 174B operates a first cell (e g., cell 124C). The scenario 400 is similar to the scenario 300. Thus, the descriptions for the scenario 300 can generally apply to the scenario 400. The differences between the scenarios 300 and 400 are described below.
[0200] Initially, the UE 102 communicates 402 with the S-DU 174A on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A. The S-DU 174A is a serving DU similar to the DU 174 in Fig. 3 A. During the communication 402, the UE 102 transmits 404, 406 at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) to the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A. Based on the at least one measurement report, the CU 172 determines to prepare cell(s) 1, .. . , N (operated by the T-DU 174B) for LTM for the UE 102, where N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1. The cell(s) 1, . . . , N are identified by cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively. In response to the determination, the CU 172 performs 490 a LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B to (request the T-DU 174B to) prepare cell(s) 1, ... , N for LTM for the UE 102. N can be a positive integer larger than zero or 1. In the LTM preparation procedure 490. the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including the cell ID(s) 1, ... , N to the T-DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) 1, ... , N for LTM for the UE 102, similar to the event 308. In response, the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-DU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. .... N to the CU 172, similar to the event 310. The LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N configures the cell(s) 1, ... , N for LTM, respectively. In details, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ••• , N include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) 1, ... , N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490 are UE Context Setup Request message and UE Context Setup Response message, respectively. The CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N in a RRC reconfiguration message in a LTM configuration delivery procedure 494, similar to the LTM configuration delivery’ procedure 394. In some implementations, the T-DU 174B can include cell index(es) 1, ... , N in the LTM DU configured on(s) 1. ... , N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 can set the cell index(es) 1, , N to different values and include the cell index(es) 1, .. . , N in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 490.
[0201] After performing the LTM preparation procedure 490, the CU 172 might perform an additional LTM preparation procedure(s) with the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) N+l, • • ■ , N+M for LTM for the UE 102, similar to the procedure 490. M is a positive integer larger than zero. The CU 172 might determine to do so based on one or more measurement reports received from the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the events 404, 406. In the additional LTM preparation procedure, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including cell ID(s) N+l, .. . . N+M to the T-DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) N+l, ... , N+M for LTM for the UE 102. The cell ID(s) N+l , ... , N+M identifies the cell ID(s) N+l , ... , N+M, respectively. In response to the CU-to-DU message, the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-DU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, • • • , N+M to the CU 172. The LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ■■ ■ , N+M configures the cell(s) N+l, ■■ ■ , N+M for LTM, respectively. In details, the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, N+M include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively. The CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M in a RRC reconfiguration message in an additional LTM configuration delivery procedure, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394 or 494.
[0202] In some implementations, the LTM preparation procedure 490 is a UE Context Setup procedure and the additional LTM preparation procedure is a UE Context Modification procedure. In other implementations, the LTM procedure 490 and the addition LTM preparation procedures are UE Context Setup procedures. In yet other implementations, the LTM procedure 490 and the addition LTM preparation procedures are UE Context Modification procedures.
[0203] In some implementations, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A might perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3. In the procedure 380, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A performs the procedure(s) 390 and/or 392 to prepare cell(s) of the S-DU 174A for LTM for the UE 102. Note, the value N in the procedure 380 or described for Fig. 3 can be the same as or different from the value N described for Fig. 4. In the procedure 390, the CU 172 might receive the first DU-to-CU message including the reference LTM DU configuration from the S-DU 174A in the event 310. In other implementations, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A does not perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102. In such cases, the CU 172 can perform 488 a reference LTM DU configuration query procedure with the S-DU 174A to obtain a reference LTM DU configuration. In the procedure 488, the CU 172 transmits 460 a CU-to-DU message to the S- DU 174A to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 can include an indication in the CU-to-DU message to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration. In response to the indication or CU-to-DU message 460, the S-DU 174 A transmits 462 a DU-to-CU message including a reference LTM DU configuration to the CU 172. In some implementations, the indication is a reference LTM DU configuration query indication. In other implementations, the indication is a LTM indication, and the CU 172 might include a query indication (e g., GNB-DU Configuration Query IE) in the CU-to-DU message. After receiving the reference LTM DU configuration (i.e.. either in the procedure 390 or in the procedure 488), the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration (received from the S-DU 174A) in the CU-to-DU message in the LTM preparation procedure 490. The T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172. In such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490. In the case of the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure. The CU 172 might not include the reference LTM DU configuration in CU-to-DU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B. In the case of the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ... , N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172.
[0204] In some implementations, the CU 172 does not provide a reference LTM DU configuration to the T-DU 174B in the LTM preparation procedure 490. In such cases, the T- DU 174B generates a reference LTM DU configuration and generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N based on the reference LTM DU configuration. In such cases, the T- DU 174B includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490. The CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 490. In the case of the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ... , N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration. In this case, the T-DU 174B might not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the T- DU 174B is different from the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the S-DU 174A. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the T-DU 174B is the same as the reference LTM DU configuration generated by the S-DU 174A.
[0205] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 380 in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 490, and the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. . , N and/or N+l, .. . , N+M, considering or based on configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) of the procedure 380.
RS resource configuration
[0206] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration X of the procedure 380 includes at least one reference signal (RS) resource configuration X, where 1 < X < N. Each of the RS resource configuration(s) X configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell X of the S-DU 174A. The RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s). The RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s). In some implementations, each of the RS resource configuration(s) X includes a RS resource configuration ID. In some implementations, the RS resource configuration(s) X is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration X includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE and the CSI-MeasConfig IE includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s). The T-DU 174B generates at least one report configuration 1 for reporting, on the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the report configuration(s) I in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the report configured on(s) 1 is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConfig IE(s). In some implementations, the T- DU 174B generates at least one RS resource configuration 1, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X and includes the RS resource configuration(s) 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the T-DU 174B includes the RS resource configuration(s) X in the RS resource configuration(s) 1. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B includes each of the RS resource configuration(s) X in the RS resource configuration(s) 1, except the RS resource configuration ID(s) in the RS resource configuration(s) X. The T- DU 174B assigns a RS resource configuration ID to a value for each of the RS resource configuration(s) 1 (including the RS resource configuration(s) X) and includes the RS resource configuration ID in the corresponding RS resource configuration.
[0207] In some implementations, the report configuration(s) 1 configures one or more UL resources (e.g.. PUCCH resources orPUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results. In some implementations, each of the report configuration(s) 1 includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the RS resource configuration(s) 1. After the UE 102 performs a LTM serving cell change to the cell 1 from the cell 124 A. the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B (i.e., the T-DU 17B becomes a S-DU for the UE 102) and transmits measurement results on the UL resource(s) via the cell 1 to the S-DU 174B, in accordance with the report configuration(s) 1. Correspondingly, the S-DU 174B receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 1 from the UE 102, in accordance with the report configuration(s) 1. In some implementations, each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values. The UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the RS resource configuration(s) 1 and/or the report configuration(s) 1 and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)). The quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
[0208] In some implementations, the T-DU 174B also includes additional RS resource configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1. Each of the additional RS resource configuration(s) configures one or more additional RSs or one or more additional RS resources associated with the cell 1. The additional RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s). The additional RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s). In some implementations, each of the additional RS resource configuration(s) includes a RS resource configuration ID. In some implementations, the additional RS resource configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConflg IE(s). In some implementations, the T-DU 174B includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s) in the CSI-MeasConfig IE. The T-DU 174B generates at least one additional report configuration for reporting, on the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the additional report configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the additional report configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConfig IE(s).
[0209] In some implementations, the additional report configuration(s) configures one or more UL resources (e.g.. PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 1 for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results. In some implementations, each of the additional report configuration(s) includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the additional RS resource configuration(s). After the UE 102 performs a LTM serving cell change to the cell 1 from the cell 124 A, the UE 102 communicates 436 with the S-DU 174B and transmits measurement results on the UL resource(s) via the cell 1 to the S-DU 174B, in accordance with the additional report configuration(s). Correspondingly, the S-DU 174B receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 1 from the UE 102, in accordance with the additional report configuration(s). In some implementations, each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values. The UE 102 performs measurements on the additional RS(s) or the additional RS resource(s) in accordance with the additional RS resource configuration(s) and/or the additional report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the additional RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)). The quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
[0210] Similarly, the T-DU 174B can generate RS resource configuration(s) 2, . . . , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M and/or report configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X, and include the RS resource configuration(s) 2, ... . N, and/or N+L .... N+M and/or the report configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ... , N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M, respectively, as described above.
TCI state configuration [0211] In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration X of the procedure 380 includes at least one TCI state configuration X, where I < X < N. Each of the TCI state configuration(s) X configures a TCI state that associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type. In some implementations, the DL RS(s) can be associated with the cell X operated by the S-DU 174A. In some implementations, each of the TCI state configuration(s) X includes a TCI state ID. In some implementations, each of the TCI state configuration(s) X is a TCI-State IE. In some implementations, the TCI state configuration(s) X includes/is/are an ul-TCI-ToAddModList-r!7 field, one or more TCI-UL-State-r 17 IES, a dl- OrJointTCI-StateToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-State IEs, TCI-ActivatedConfig lE and/or a tci-StatesToAddModList field. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration X includes a PDSCH-Conflg IE and the PDSCH-Conflg IE includes the TCI state configuration(s) X. In some implementations, the T-DU 174B generates at least one TCI state configuration 1, considering or based on the TCI state configuration(s) X and includes the TCI state configuration(s) 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the TCI state configuration(s) 1 includes the TCI state configuration(s) X. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B includes each of the TCI state configuration(s) X in the TCI state configuration(s) 1, except the TCI state ID(s) in the TCI state configuration(s) X. The T-DU 174B assigns a TCI state ID to a value for each of the TCI state configuration(s) 1 (including the TCI state configuration(s) X) and includes the TCI state ID in the corresponding TCI state configuration. While the UE 102 and the S-DU 174B communicate 436 with one another, the S-DU 174B might transmit a LTM command to the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a fast serving cell change to the cell X. The S-DU 174B includes a TCI state ID in the LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to apply a TCI state configuration identified by the TCI state ID to communicate on the cell X, where the TCI state configuration is one of the TCI state configuration(s) X or includes configurations of one of the TCI state configuration(s) X.
[0212] Similarly, the T-DU 174B can generate TCI state configuration(s) 2, ... , N, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) X, and include the TCI state configuration(s) 2, .... N, and/or N+l, ... , N+M in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2. .... N, and/or N+l, ■ • N+M. respectively, as described above.
[0213] In some implementations, in cases where the CU 172 performs the procedure 380 after performing the procedure 490, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 490 in the CU-to-DU message of the procedure 380, and the S-DU 174A generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1. . .. , N of the procedure 380, considering or based on configurations in the LTM DU configuration(s) of the procedure 490, in a similar way as described above.
[0214] In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns ID(s) 1, N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, , N (received from the T-DU 174B), respectively, and performs the procedure 492 with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ... , N to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392. Thus, the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) 1, ... , N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) 1, ... , N identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) 1, ... , N (generated by the T-DU 174B), respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message of the procedure 490, similar to the event 310. In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns ID(s) N+l. ... , N+M identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively, and performs a procedure (similar to the procedure 492) with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392. Thus, the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) N+l, .. . , N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+L .... N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M identifying the LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M, respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the DU-to-CU message of the additional LTM preparation procedure, similar to the event 310.
[0215] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits 412 a CU-to-DU message including the ID(s) 1 , ... , N to the S-DU 174 A and receives 414 a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response. The CU-to-DU message 412 and DU-to-CU message 414 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as a LTM ID transfer procedure 493 or a LTM cell index transfer procedure 493. In some implementations, the message 412 and message 414 can be UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N and/or cell ID(s) 1, .. . , N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In one implementation, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 1, ... , N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In another implementation, the CU 172 includes the cell index(es) 1, ... , N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) 1, ... , N, cell ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) 1, ... , N, cell ID(s) 1, .. . . N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1. . .. , N in a CU-to-DU message similar to the message 412. Thus, the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) 1, ... , N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ... , N, respectively. In other alternative implementations, the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM cell index transfer procedures to transmit the cell index(es) 1, , N, cell ID(s) 1, ... , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the cell index(es) 1, . . . , N, cell ID(s) 1, . . . , N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, . . . , N in a CU- to-DU message similar to the message 412. Thus, the S-DU 174A associates the cell index(es) I , . . . . N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 , . . . , N and/or the cell ID(s) 1 , . . . , N. respectively.
RS resource configuration
[0216] In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates a first serving DU configuration, based on the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2,... , and/or N. and includes the first serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message 414. In some implementations, the first serving DU configuration including configurations updating (e.g., augmenting, modifying or replacing) the serving DU configuration 402. In other implementations, the first serving DU configuration includes configurations that are not included in the serving DU configuration 402. The CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the first serving DU configuration to the UE 102. The UE 102 applies the first serving DU configuration to communicate with the serving DU upon receiving the RRC reconfiguration message. For example, the RRC reconfiguration message is or is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 494. Depending on implementations, the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174A using configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and not updated by the first serving DU configuration. The following are example implementations of generating the first serving DU configuration based on the LTM DU configuration 1, ... , N.
[0217] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration Y of the procedure 490 includes at least one RS resource configuration Y, where 1 < Y < N. Each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y configures one or more RSs or one or more RS resources associated with the cell Y of the T-DU 174B. The RS(s) includes SSB(s) and/or CSI-RS(s). The RS resource(s) includes SSB resource(s) and/or CSI-RS resource(s). In some implementations, each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y includes a RS resource configuration ID. In some implementations, the RS resource configuration(s) Y is/are (similar to) CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration Y includes a CSI-MeasConfig IE and the CSI- MeasConfig IE includes the CSI-ResourceConfig IE(s). The S-DU 174A generates at least one serving report configuration for reporting, on the cell 124A, measurement results of the RS(s) or RS resource(s) and includes the serving report configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the serving report configuration(s) is/are (similar to) CSI-ReportConflg IE(s). In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates at least one serving RS resource configuration, considering or based on the RS resource configuration(s) Y and includes the serving RS resource configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A includes the RS resource configuration(s) Y in the serving RS resource configuration(s). In other implementations, the S-DU 174A includes each of the RS resource configuration(s) Y in the serving RS resource configuration(s). except the RS resource configuration ID(s) in the RS resource configuration(s) Y. The S-DU 174A assigns a RS resource configuration ID to a value for each of the serving RS resource configuration(s) (including the RS resource configuration(s) Y) and includes the RS resource configuration ID in the corresponding serving RS resource configuration.
[0218] In some implementations, the serving report configuration(s) configures one or more UU resources (e.g., PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) on the cell 124A for the UE 102 to transmit measurement results. In some implementations, each of the serving report configuration(s) includes one or more RS resource configuration IDs identifying one or more RS resource configurations included in the serving RS resource configuration(s). While the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174A, the UE 102 transmits measurement results on the UL resource(s) via the cell 124A to the S-DU 174A, in accordance with the serving report configuration(s) (e.g., event 424). Correspondingly, the S-DU 174A receives the measurement results on the UL resource (s) via the cell 124A from the UE 102. in accordance with the serving report configuration(s). In some implementations, each of the measurement results includes one or more RS resource indicators and/or one or more quantized measurement values. The UE 102 performs measurements on the RS(s) or the RS resource(s) in accordance with the serving RS resource configuration(s) and/or the serving report configuration(s) and obtains the quantized measurement values from the measurements. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) indicates the RS(s) or a RS resource(s) where the UE 102 perform measurements or obtains the quantized measurement values. In some implementations, the RS resource indicator(s) includes one or more SSB resource indicators (SSBRI(s)) and/or one or more CSI-RS resource indicators (CRI(s)). The quantized measurement values might include one or more Ll-RSRP values and/or one or more Ll-SINR values.
TCI state configuration
[0219] In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration Y of the procedure 490 includes at least one TCI state configuration Y, where 1 < Y < N. Each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y configures a TCI state that associates or includes one or two DL RSs with a corresponding QCL type. In some implementations, the DL RS(s) can be associated with the cell Y operated by the T-DU 174B. In some implementations, each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y includes a TCI state ID. In some implementations, each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y is a TCI-State IE. In some implementations, the TCI state configuration(s)
Y includes/is/are an ul-TCI-ToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-UL-State-r 17 IES, a dl- OrJointTCI-StateToAddModList-r 17 field, one or more TCI-State IEs, TCI-ActivatedConflg IE and/or a tci-StatesToAddModList field. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration
Y includes a PDSCH-Config IE and the PDSCH-Config IE includes the TCI state configuration(s) Y. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates at least one serving TCI state configuration, considering or based on the TCI state configuration(s) Y and includes the serving TCI state configuration(s) in the first serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the serving TCI state configuration(s) 1 includes the TCI state configuration(s) Y. In other implementations, the S-DU 174A includes each of the TCI state configuration(s) Y in the serving TCI state configuration(s), except the TCI state ID(s) in the TCI state configuration(s) Y. The S-DU 174A assigns a TCI state ID to a value for each of the serving TCI state configuration(s) (including the TCI state configuration(s) Y) and includes the TCI state ID in the corresponding serving TCI state configuration. While the S-DU 174A communicate 436 with the UE 102, the S-DU 174A might transmit a LTM command to the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a fast serving cell change to the cell Y. The S-DU 174 A includes a TCI state ID in the LTM command to indicate to the UE 102 to apply a TCI state configuration identified by the TCI state ID to communicate on the cell Y, where the TCI state configuration is one of the TCI state configuration(s) Y or includes configurations of one of the TCI state configuration(s) Y.
[0220] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M to the S-DU 174A and receives a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response, similar to the CU-to-DU message 412 and the DU-to-CU message 414, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) N+L ... , N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M in the CU-to-DU message. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 can perform multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M and/or LTM DU configured on(s) N+l, ... , N+M to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ... , N+M and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ... , N in a CU-to-DU message similar to the message 412. Thus, the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) N+l , . . . , N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, . . . , N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l , . .. , N+M, respectively. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates a second serving DU configuration, based on the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, N+2, and/or N+M, and includes the second serving DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the second serving DU configuration including configurations updating (e.g., augmenting, modifying or replacing) the first serving DU configuration and/or updating configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and not updated by the first serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the second serving DU configuration includes configurations that are not included in the first serving DU configuration. The CU 172 transmits a RRC reconfiguration message including the second serving DU configuration to the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A. The UE 102 applies the second serving DU configuration to communicate with the serving DU upon receiving the RRC reconfiguration message. For example, the RRC reconfiguration message is or is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 494. Depending on implementations, the UE 102 communicates with the S- DU 174A using configurations included in the serving DU configuration 402 and/or the first serving DU configuration and not updated by the second serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates one or more new LI measurement configurations, based on LI measurement configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, N+2,... , and/or N+M, and includes the new LI measurement configuration(s) in the second serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A generates one or more new TCI state configuration, based on TCI state configuration(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l , N+2,... , and/or N+M, and includes the new TCI state configuration(s) in the second serving DU configuration.
[0221] In some implementations, in the case that the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ... , N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ... ., N, and the ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400. In some implementations, in the case that the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1. ... . N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1. ... ., N, and the cell ID(s) N+l ,... ., N+M described for the scenario 400. In some implementations, in the case that the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ... , N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ... N, and the cell index(es) N+l >... .. N+M described for the scenario 400. [0222] Later in time, the UE 102 might transmit 424 at least one measurement report to the S-DU 174A, similar to the event 324. The at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)) includes an event ID, first measurement result(s) for the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, and/or includes second measurement result(s) for the cell 124A. In some implementations, the first measurement result(s) can be or include RSRP, RSRQ and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 1. Likewise, the second measurement result(s) can be or include RSRP. RSRQ and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 124A. In some implementations, the event ID, RSRP, RSRQ and/or SINR are Ll-event ID, Ll-RSRP, Ll-RSRQ and/or Ll-SINR, respectively. Based on the first measurement result(s) and/or second measurement result(s), the S-DU 174A might transmit 430 a first LTM command (i. e. , LTM command 1) including the ID 1 to the UE 102 to order the UE 102 to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 of the T- DU 174B. In some implementations, the first LTM command includes the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID). In other implementations, the first LTM command includes the cell index 1. When the UE 102 receives the first LTM command, the UE 102 performs a serving cell change to the cell 1 from a serving cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 might or might not perform 432 a random access procedure with the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 332. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or completing the random access procedure 432, the UE 102 might communicates 436 with the T-DU 174B on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 336. If a serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380, the serving cell can be the cell 1 or cell 2 of the S-DU 174A. Otherwise, if no serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380 or the procedure 380 is not performed, the serving cell is the cell 124A. If the first LTM command includes the LTM ID 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1), based the LTM ID 1, as described for Fig. 3. If the first LTM command includes the cell index 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1, cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1) and/or LTM ID 1, based the cell index 1, as described for Fig. 3. The UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the T-DU 174B, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or successfully accessing the cell 1.
[0223] When or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command 430, the S-DU 174A might transmit 429 to the CU 172 a DU- to-CU message indicating LTM (being) executed. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A includes the cell ID 1 or the LTM ID 1 in the DU-to-CU message 429 to indicate that the S- DU 174A is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a LTM serving cell change. The S-DU 174A can transmit the DU-to-CU message 429 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 430. In some implementations, when or after the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 429, the CU 172 might stop or suspend transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the S-DU 174A until receiving the DU-to-CU message 434. After receiving the DU-to-CU message 434. the CU 172 starts, continues or resumes transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the T-DU 174B. When or after the T-DU 174B detects that UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the T-DU 174B transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
[0224] The resource release procedure 496 can be similar to the procedure 396. Alternatively, in the resource release procedure 496. the CU 172 can transmit a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Command message) to the S-DU 174A to release a UE context of the UE 102. In response, the S-DU 174A releases a UE context of the UE 102 and transmits 440 a DU- to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Complete message) to the CU-172.
[0225] The events 380, 404, 406, 490. 492, 494. 494, 424. 426, 428, 429, 430, 431, 432, 434, 436, 496, 498, 456 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as a LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 480.
[0226] Referring next to Fig. 5A, in a scenario 500 A, the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN. The SN 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174. The scenario 500A is similar to the scenario 300. except that the scenario 500A is a DC scenario and the scenario 300 is a single connectivity (SC) scenario. The MN 106 can include a CU and a DU similar to the base station 104 of Fig. 3.
[0227] Initially, the UE 102 in DC communicates with the MN 106 and with SN 104. In the event 502, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302. In some alternative implementations, the UE 102 does not communicate with the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302. In some implementations, the UE 102 in DC can communicate 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 and/or SN 104 via radio bearers which can include SRBs and/or DRB(s). The MN 106 and/or the SN 104 can configure the radio bearers to the UE 102. The UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the SN 104 on an SCG (i.e., SCG radio resources) that the SN 104 configures for communication with the UE 102. The UE 102 in DC communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 on an MCG (i.e., MCG radio resources) in accordance with a MN configuration (i.e., MCG configuration). In some implementations, the serving DU configuration is a SN configuration (i.e., SCG configuration). In the MN configuration, the MN 106 configures the MCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 126 and/or other cell(s)) operated by the MN 106. In the serving DU configuration, the SN 106A configures the SCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 124A and/or other cell(s)) operated by the SN 104. In some implementations, the MN configuration includes multiple configuration parameters and the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the MN 106. As described for Fig. 3, the serving DU configuration includes multiple configuration parameters. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives these configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the SN 104, e.g., via the MN 106 and/or on an SRB (e.g., SRB3) that the MN 106 or SN 104 configures to exchange RRC messages between the UE 102 and the SN 104.
[0228] While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the MN 106 can perform 580 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480. In some implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 can transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and cell 124A in the events 504 and 506, similar to the events 304 and 306, respectively. In other implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 can transmit 505 at least one measurement report to the MN 106 via the cell 126. The MN 106 in turn transmits 507 the at least one measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the MN 106 generates at least one SN message including the at least one measurement report and transmits the at least one SN message to the CU 172 in the event 507. In one implementation, the at least one SN message include RRC Transfer message(s) and/or SN Modification Request message(s).
[0229] After (e.g.. in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report or while the SN 104 communicates with the UE 102, the SN 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3. The events 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, and 556 are similar to the events 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332. 334, 336, 396, 398, and 356, respectively. After receiving the first LTM command 530, transmitting the acknowledgement 531. or determining that the UE 102 successfully connects to the first cell 532 or 536, the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 536 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates 536 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 336. Later in time, the DU 174 and/or CU 172 can perform the LTM execution procedure 598 with the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a cell change from the first cell to the second cell, similar to the procedure 398 or 498. As a result of the procedure 598, the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 556 with the DU 174 on the second cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 2 and communicates 556 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 356.
[0230] The events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5A as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 581.
[0231] Referring next to Fig. 5B, a scenario 500B is generally similar to the scenario 500A, except that the SN 104 transmits 517, 519 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 521, 523 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106. The RRC reconfiguration message 517. 519 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. The RRC reconfiguration complete message 521, 523 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 320, 322. In some implementations, the SN 104 generates a first SN message (e.g., SN Modification Required message, SN Modification Required message, or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits the first SN message to the MN 106 in the event 517. The MN 106 generates a MN RRC message including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits 519 the MN RRC message to the UE 102. In response, the UE 102 generates a MN RRC response message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits 521 the MN RRC response message to the MN 106. In some implementations, the MN 106 generates a second SN message (e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits the second SN message to the SN 104 in the event 523. In some implementations, the MN RRC message and MN RRC response message can be a RRC reconfiguration message and a RRC reconfiguration complete message, respectively.
[0232] The events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 517, 519, 521, 523, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5B as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 582.
[0233] Referring next to Fig. 6A. in a scenario 600 A. the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-500B. The SN 104 includes a CU 172, an S-DU 174A and a T-DU 174B, similar to the base station 104 in the scenario 400. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the MN 106 can perform 680 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M- DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 681 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A or S-DU 174B. similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
[0234] Referring next to Fig. 6B, a scenario 600B similar to the scenarios 300-500B and 600 A, except that that the SN 104 transmits 617, 619 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 621, 623 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
[0235] Referring next to Fig. 7A, in a scenario 700A, the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-600B. The base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A and a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B. The CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN. similar to the base station 104 in Fig. 3 or the MN 106 in Figs. 5A-6B, and the CU 172 operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN, similar to the SN 104 in Figs. 5A-6B.
[0236] In the scenario 700 A, the UE 102 initially communicates 702 in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B and communicates 702 with the CU 172 via the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B. In the event 702, the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174B using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302. Events 704 and 706 are similar to the events 304 and 306. In some implementations, the UE 102 can transmit 705 at least one measurement report to the M-DU 174A, similar to the event 304. The M-DU 174A in turn transmits 707 at least one DU-to-CU message including the at les tone measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 780 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380.
[0237] The events 704, 706. 705, 707. 790, 792. 794, 724. 726, 728, 729, 730, 731 , 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7A as a LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 781.
[0238] Referring next to Fig. 7B, a scenario 700B similar to the scenarios 300-600B and 700 A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 717, 719 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 721. 723 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174 A.
[0239] The events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 717, 719, 721, 723, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7B as a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 782. [0240] Referring next to Fig. 8A, in a scenario 800A, the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-700B. The base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A, a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B and a target secondary DU (T-DU) 174C. The CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN and operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 880 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A. similar to the procedure 380. While the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 can perform 881 a LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the S-DU 174 A, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
[0241] Referring next to Fig. 8B. a scenario 800B similar to the scenarios 300-700B and 800 A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 817, 819 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 821, 823 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174 A.
[0242] Next, several example methods, which can be implemented in a RAN node (e.g., a base station, a DU or a CU) or a UE, for configuring and/or activating one or more TCI state configurations for a LTM candidate cell (i.e., a cell for LTM), are discussed next with reference to Figs. 9A-12C. Descriptions described for Figs. 3-8B can apply to Figs. 9A-12C.
[0243] Fig. 9A illustrates an example method 900A, which can be implemented by a DU (e.g.. the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B).
[0244] The method 900A begins at block 902, where the DU receives a first CU-to-DU message from a CU, including a first CSI resource configuration list, where the list includes at least one first CSI resource configuration (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493. 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893). At block 904, the DU generates a first CSI report configuration list based on the first CSI resource configuration list, where the first CSI report configuration list includes at least one first CSI report configuration for reporting one or more CSI reports of one or more CSI resources configured in the first CSI resource configuration(s). At block 906, the DU transmits a first DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390. 314, 392. 462, 488, 490. 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
[0245] In some implementations, the DU includes the first CSI report configuration list in a first DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the first DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the CU transmits includes the first CSI report configuration list or the first DU configuration in a first message and transmits the first message to the UE via a RAN node. For example, the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316. 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894. In some implementations, the RAN node is the DU, another DU or a base station. In some implementations, the first DU configuration is a serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the first DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
[0246] The flow might proceed to block 908 where the DU receives a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI resource configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). The flow might proceed to block 910 where the DU might generate a CSI report configuration release list to release at least one of the CSI report configuration(s), based on the CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s). At block 912, the DU might transmit a second DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the CSI report configuration release list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 914, the DU releases the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s). [0247] In some implementations, the DU includes the CSI report configuration release list in a second DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the second DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the CU transmits includes the CSI report configuration release list or the second DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via the RAN node. For example, the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318. 394, 494. 594, 694. 794, 894. In some implementations, the second DU configuration is a serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the second DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
[0248] In some implementations, the CU-to-DU message described above can be a UE Context Setup Request message or a UE Context Modification Request message. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message described above can be a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message. In other implementations, the DU-to-CU message described above is a UE Context Modification Required message. In response, the CU might transmit a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU. In such cases, the DU might transmit an additional DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU in response to the CU-to-DU message.
[0249] In some implementations, the first CSI resource configuration list is an Itm-CSI- ResourceConfigToAddModList field or IE. In some implementations, each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) in the first CSI resource configuration list is an LTM-CSI- ResourceConfig IE. In some implementations, each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes a CSI resource configuration ID (e.g.. LTM-CSI-ResourceConfigld) identifying the CSI resource configuration. In some implementations, each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes a CSI resource set (e.g., a CSI SSB resource set or a CSI-RS resource set). In some implementations, the first CSI resource configuration list is associated to a cell (e.g., a LTM candidate cell). In some implementations, each of the first CSI resource configuration(s) includes one or more LTM IDs identifying respective LTM DU configuration(s). In other implementations, each CSI resource set includes one or more LTM IDs identifying respective LTM DU configuration(s).
[0250] If a CSI resource configuration in the first CSI resource configuration list includes a CSI resource configuration ID the same as an existing CSI resource configuration (i.e., received by or stored in the DU before receiving the first CU-to-DU message), the DU modifies or replaces the existing CSI resource configuration with the received CSI resource configuration. If a CSI resource configuration and an associated CSI resource configuration ID are not received by the UE, the DU stores the received CSI resource configuration.
[0251] In some implementations, the CSI resource configuration release list is an Itm-CSI- ResourceConfigToReleaseList. In some implementations, the CSI resource configuration release list includes at least one CSI resource configuration ID to release or indicate releasing the at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s). Each of the at least one CSI resource configuration ID identifies a respective one of the first CSI resource configuration(s).
[0252] In some implementations, the first CU-to-DU message requests to prepare a LTM candidate cell for the UE. For example, the candidate cell is the first cell (i.e., cell 1) described for Figs. 3-8B. In some implementations, the CU includes a cell ID (e.g., CGI) of the LTM candidate cell in the first CU-to-DU message. Thus, the DU generates a LTM DU configuration for the LTM candidate cell. In some implementations, the CU includes a LTM ID in the first CU-to-DU message. In other implementations, the CU includes a cell (e.g., CGI) of a serving cell of the UE in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU may refrain from generating a LTM DU configuration in response to receiving the first CU-to-DU message including the cell ID of the serving cell. [0253] In some implementations, the DU is a serving DU or a source DU. In some implementations, the DU stores a mapping list including one or more {CSI report configuration, SSBRI, LTM ID}s for one or more respective LTM candidate cells. Each the CSI report configuration configures time and/or frequency resources for the UE to transmit a CSI report. In some scenarios or implementations, the DU receives a CSI report (e.g., LTM CSI report) on time and/or frequency resources from the UE and the CSI report includes a SS/PBCH Resource Block Indicator (SSBRI). In such cases, the DU looks up the mapping list to identify a corresponding LTM ID in accordance with the received SSBRI and the time and/or frequency resources where the SSBRI is received. The DU may determine to command the UE to perform a LTM cell switch and transmit a LTM command including the LTM ID to the UE (e.g.. events 330, 430, 530, 630, 730, 830). In some implementations, each of the {CSI report configuration, SSBRI, LTM ID}s may include a CGI for a respective LTM candidate cell. The DU may identify a CGI of a LTM candidate cell based on the received SSBRI and the time and/or frequency resources where the SSBRI is received. Thus, the DU may transmit a DU-to-CU message including the CGI to the CU to indicate that the UE is performing a LTM cell switch to the LTM candidate cell (e.g., events 329, 429, 529, 629, 729, 829).
[0254] Example and descriptions described above can apply to the following example methods.
[0255] Fig. 9B is a flow diagram of an example method 900B similar to the method 900A, except that the method 900B includes blocks 909, 911, 913. and 915 instead of blocks 908, 910, 912, and 914.
[0256] The method 900B begins at blocks 902, 904, and 906. The flow might then proceed to block 909 where the DU receive a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a second CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392. 460, 488, 490. 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 911, the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list, based on the second CSI resource configuration list. At block 913, the DU transmits a second DU-to-CU message to the CU, including the second CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390. 314, 392, 462. 488, 490, 492. 414, 493, 590. 592, 688. 690. 692, 693. 790. 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 915, the DU replaces the first CSI report configuration list with the second CSI report configuration list.
[0257] In some implementations, the DU includes the second CSI report configuration list in a second DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the second DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the CU transmits includes the second CSI report configuration list or the second DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via the RAN node. For example, the first message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894. In some implementations, the second DU configuration is a serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the second DU configuration is a LTM DU configuration.
[0258] In some implementations, the DU determines whether the second CSI resource configuration list is identical to the first CSI resource configuration. If the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is different from the first CSI resource configuration, the DU performs the actions described at blocks 911, 913, and/or 915. In such a case, the DU may replace the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. Otherwise, if the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is the same as the first CSI resource configuration, the DU does not perform actions described at blocks 911, 913, and 915. Alternatively, in such a case, the DU still performs the actions described at blocks 911, 913, and/or 915.
[0259] In some implementations, the DU includes the second CSI report configuration list in a third serving DU configuration (e.g., a CellGroupConfig IE) and includes the third serving DU configuration in the second DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the CU transmits includes the second CSI report configuration list or the third serving DU configuration in a second message and transmits the second message to the UE via a RAN node. For example, the second message is a RRC reconfiguration similar to the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794, 894.
[0260] In some implementations, the DU replaces the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. In some implementations, the method 900B can be combined with the method 900A by change the '‘first CSI report configuration’’ to the “second CSI report configuration”.
[0261] Examples and implementations of the first CSI resource configuration list and the first CSI report configuration list as described for Fig. 9A can apply to the second CSI resource configuration list and the second CSI report configuration list.
[0262] Fig. 9C is a flow diagram of an example method 900C similar to the methods 900A and 900B, except that the method 900C includes blocks 921 and 925 instead of blocks 911 and 915.
[0263] The method 900C begins at blocks 902, 904, and/or 906, and might proceed to block
909. The flow might proceed to block 921 where the DU receives a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, including a second CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390. 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492. 412, 493, 590. 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888. 890, 892, or 893). At block 925, the DU modifies the first CSI report configuration list with the second CSI report configuration list.
[0264] In some implementations, the DU determines whether the second CSI resource configuration list is identical to the first CSI resource configuration. If the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration hst is different from the first CSI resource configuration, the DU performs the actions described at blocks 921, 913 and/or 925. In such a case, the DU may modify the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. Otherwise, if the DU determines that the second CSI resource configuration list is the same as the first CSI resource configuration, the DU does not perform actions described at blocks 921, 913 and 925.
[0265] In other implementations, CSI resource configuration ID(s) for the second CSI resource configuration(s) are different from the CSI resource configuration(s) for the first CSI resource configuration(s). In such cases, the second CSI report configuration(s) are extra CSI report configuration(s) in addition to the first CSI report configuration(s).
[0266] In some implementations, the DU modifies the first CSI resource configuration list with the second CSI resource configuration list. In some implementations, the method 900C can be combined with the method 900A by change the “first CSI report configuration” to the “second CSI report configuration”.
[0267] Fig. 1 OA illustrates an example method 1000A, which can be implemented by a CU (e.g., the CU 172 in Figs. 3-8B).
[0268] The method 1000A begins at block 1002, where the CU transmits a first CU-to-DU message to a DU, including a first CSI resource configuration list, where the list includes at least one first CSI resource configuration (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 1006, the CU receives a first DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a first CSI report configuration list, where the first CSI report configuration list includes at least one first CSI report configuration for reporting one or more CSI reports of one or more CSI resources configured in the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 1007, the CU transmits a first message including the first CSI report configuration hst to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819). The flow might proceed to block 1008 where the CU transmits a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, including a CSI resource configuration release list, where the CSI resource configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI resource configuration(s) (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 1012, the CU receive a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a CSI report configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 462. 488, 490, 492. 414, 493. 590, 592, 688. 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 1014, the CU transmits a second message including the CSI report configuration release list to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494. 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819).
[0269] Examples and implementations for blocks 902, 906, 908, and 912 can apply to blocks 1002, 1006, 1008, and 1012.
[0270] Fig. 10B is a flow diagram of an example method 1000B similar to the method 1000A, except that the method 1000B includes block 1009, 1013, and 1015 instead of blocks 1008, 1012, and 1014.
[0271] The method 1000B begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007. The flow might proceed to block 1009 where the CU Transmit a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, including a second CSI resource configuration list to replace the first CSI resource configuration list (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693. 790, 792, 888. 890, 892. or 893). At block 1013, the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). The flow might proceed to block 1015 where the CU transmits a second message including the second CSI report configuration list to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817- 819).
[0272] Examples and implementations for blocks 909, 911, and 913 can apply to blocks 909 and 913.
[0273] Fig. 10C is a flow diagram of an example method 1000C similar to the methods 1000A and 1000B, except that the method 1000C includes block 1023 instead of block 1013.
[0274] At block 1023 where the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a second CSI report configuration list to augment (e.g., modify or update) the first CSI report configuration list (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 462, 488. 490, 492, 414. 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). Examples and implementations for blocks 921 and 913 can apply to block 1023.
[0275] Fig. HA illustrates an example method 1100A similar to block 900A, which can be implemented by a DU (e.g., the DU 174, DU 174A, DU 174B or DU 174C in Figs. 3-8B).
[0276] The method 1100A begins at blocks 902, 904, and 906. The flow then proceeds to block 1102 where the DU transmits an additional DU-to-CU message including a LTM DU configuration for a LTM candidate cell to the CU (e.g., events 310, 390, 314. 392, 490. 492. 590, 592, 690, 692, 790, 792, 890, 892). In some implementations, the DU receives an additional CU-to-DU message requesting to configure the LTM candidate cell from the CU (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 490, 492, 590, 592, 690, 692, 790, 792, 890, 892). The additional CU-to-DU message may include a cell ID (e.g.. CGI) of the candidate cell. In response to the additional CU-to-DU message, the DU generates the LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Required message. In such cases, the DU receives a UE Context Modification Confirm message from the CU in response. In other implementations, the additional DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Setup Response message or a UE Context Modification Response message. In some implementations, the additional CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Setup Request message or a UE Context Modification Request message. In some implementations, the additional DU-to-CU message and the first DU-to-CU message can be combined as a single DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the additional CU-to-DU message and the first CU-to-DU message can be combined as a single CU-to-DU message.
[0277] At block 1104, the DU might receive a second CU-to-DU message from the CU, indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell. At block 1106, the DU releases the LTM DU configuration. The flow might proceed to block 1110 where the DU generates a CSI report configuration release list to release at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing the at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s). The flow might then proceed to blocks 912 and/or 914.
[0278] In some implementations, the DU receives the second CU-to-DU message, and the DU releases the LTM DU configuration in response to the second CU-to-DU message at block 1106. In other implementations, the DU determines to release the LTM DU configuration by itself without receiving a CU-to-DU message indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell. In such cases, the DU releases the LTM DU configuration in response to the determination. In some implementations, the CU includes the cell ID in the second CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, the DU includes the cell ID in the second DU-to-CU message.
[0279] Fig. 11B is a flow diagram of an example method 1100B similar to the methods 1100A and 900B, except that the method 1100B includes blocks 1111, 913, and 915 instead of blocks 1110, 912, and 914.
[0280] At block 1111 , the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to replace the first CSI report configuration list in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration. The flow might then proceed to blocks 913 and/or 915.
[0281] Fig. 11C is a flow diagram of an example method 1100C similar to the methods 1100A and 1100B, except that the method 1100C includes block 1121 instead of block 1111.
[0282] At block 1121. the DU generates a second CSI report configuration list to augment (e.g., modify or update) the first CSI report configuration list in response to releasing the LTM DU configuration. The flow might then proceed to blocks 913 and/or 915.
[0283] Fig. 12A illustrates an example method 1200A, which can be implemented by a CU (e.g., the CU 172 in Figs. 3-8B). The method 1200A is similar to block 1000A except the method 1200A includes blocks 1202, 1204, 1208, and 1212 instead of blocks 1008 and 1012.
[0284] The method 1200A begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007. The flow proceeds to block 1202 where the CU receives an additional DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a LTM DU configuration for a LTM candidate cell. The flow might proceed to block 1204 where the CU transmits an additional message including the LTM DU configuration to the UE (e.g., events 316-318, 394, 494, 594, 517-519, 694, 617-619, 794, 717-719, 894, or 817-819). In some implementations, the additional message and the first message can be combined as a single message.
[0285] The flow might proceed to block 1208 where the CU transmits a second CU-to-DU message to the DU, indicating releasing the LTM candidate cell (e.g., events 308, 390, 312, 392, 460, 488, 490, 492, 412, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893). At block 1212, the CU receives a second DU-to-CU message from the DU, including a CSI report configuration release list, where the CSI report configuration release list releases or indicates releasing at least one of the first CSI report configuration(s) (e.g.. events 310. 390. 314, 392, 462, 488, 490, 492, 414, 493, 590, 592, 688, 690, 692, 693, 790, 792, 888, 890, 892, or 893).
[0286] Examples and implementations for blocks 1102, 1104, 1110, and 912 can apply to blocks 1202, 1208. 1212. [0287] Fig. 12B is a flow diagram of an example method 1200B similar to the methods 1200A and 1000B, except that the method 1200B does not include block 1212. The method 1200B begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007 and then proceeds to blocks 1202 and might further proceed to blocks 1204 and 1208. The flow might then proceed to blocks 1013 and/or 1015.
[0288] Fig. 12C is a flow diagram of an example method 1200C similar to the methods 1200A. 1200B, and 1000C, except that the method 1200C does not include block 1212. The method 1200C begins at blocks 1002, 1006, and 1007 and then proceeds to blocks 1202, 1204, and/or 1208. The flow might then proceed to blocks 1023 and/or 1015.
[0289] The following description may be applied to the description above.
[0290] Generally speaking, description for one of the above figures can apply to another of the above figures. Examples, implementations and methods described above can be combined, if there is no conflict. An event or block described above can be optional or omitted. For example, an event or block with dashed lines in the figures can be optional. The description described from the perspective of the receiving node also applies to the sending node. For example, a description that a receiving node (e.g., DU) receives a message from a sending node (e.g., CU) may be replaced by the sending node sending a message to the receiving node. Similarly, a description that a receiving node (e.g., CU) receives a message from a sending node (e.g., DU) may be replaced by the sending node sending a message to the receiving node. [0291] In some implementations, “message” is used and can be replaced by “information element (IE)”, and vice versa. In some implementations, “IE” is used and can be replaced by “field”, and vice versa. In some implementations, “configuration” can be replaced by “configurations” or “configuration parameters”, and vice versa. In some implementations, the “LTM command” can be replaced by “serving cell change command”, “Layer 1/Layer 2 LTM cell switch command”, “lower layer switching command” or “lower layer serving cell change command”. In some implementations, “some” means “one or more”. In some implementations, “at least one” means “one or more”. In some implementations, the “DU configuration” can be replaced by “cell group configuration”. In some implementations, the “cell index” can be replaced with “serving cell index”. “LTM cell index”, “special cell (SpCell) index”, “PCell index” or “PSCell index”. In some implementations, the “serving” can be replaced by “source”. In some implementations, the “measurement report” can be replaced by “measurement result(s)”. In some implementations, the “early TA acquisition” can be replaced by “early UL timing synchronization” or “early UL synchronization”. In some implementations, the “early TA acquisition on a/the candidate cell” can be replaced by “early UL timing synchronization with a/the candidate cell” or “early UL synchronization with a/the candidate cell”.
[0292] A user device in which the techniques of this disclosure can be implemented (e.g, the UE 102) can be any suitable device capable of wireless communications such as a smartphone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a mobile gaming console, a point-of-sale (POS) terminal, a health monitoring device, a drone, a camera, a media-streaming dongle or another personal media device, a wearable device such as a smartwatch, a wireless hotspot, a femtocell, or a broadband router. Further, the user device in some cases may be embedded in an electronic system such as the head unit of a vehicle or an advanced driver assistance system (ADAS). Still further, the user device can operate as an intemet-of-things (loT) device or a mobile-internet device (MID). Depending on the type, the user device can include one or more general-purpose processors, a computer-readable memory, a user interface, one or more network interfaces, one or more sensors, etc.
[0293] Certain embodiments are described in this disclosure as including logic or a number of components or modules. Modules may can be software modules (e.g., code, or machine- readable instructions stored on non-transitory machine-readable medium) or hardware modules. A hardware module is a tangible unit capable of performing certain operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner. A hardware module can comprise dedicated circuitry or logic that is permanently configured (e.g., as a special-purpose processor, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), etc.) to perform certain operations. A hardware module may also comprise programmable logic or circuitry' (e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor) that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. The decision to implement a hardware module in dedicated and permanently configured circuitry, or in temporarily configured circuitry (e.g, configured by software) may be driven by cost and time considerations.
[0294] When implemented in software, the techniques can be provided as part of the operating system, a library used by multiple applications, a particular software application, etc. The software can be executed by one or more general-purpose processors or one or more special-purpose processors.
[0295] Upon reading this disclosure, those of skill in the art will appreciate still additional and alternative structural and functional designs for handling mobility between base stations through the principles disclosed herein. Thus, while particular embodiments and applications have been illustrated and described, it is to be understood that the disclosed embodiments are not limited to the precise construction and components disclosed herein. Various modifications, changes and variations, which will be apparent to those of ordinary- skill in the art, may be made in the arrangement, operation and details of the method and apparatus disclosed herein without departing from the spirit and scope defined in the appended claims.
[0296] Example 1 is a method of wireless communication at a DU of a base station, comprising: receiving, from a CU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report; transmitting, to the CU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations; receiving, from the CU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and transmitting, to the CU based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0297] Example 2 is the method of example 1, where the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
[0298] Example 3 is the method of any of examples 1 -2, wherein the third message further indicates a third list of CSI resource configurations, the modification being to release the third list of CSI resource configurations from the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0299] Example 4 is the method of any of examples 1 -3, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, further including releasing the first CSI resource for the CSI report according to the release indicated in the fourth message.
[0300] Example 5 is the method of any of examples 1-4, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to replace the first list of CSI resource configurations with a different list of CSI resource configurations.
[0301] Example 6 is the method of any of examples 1-5, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource, the second CSI resource being available for the CSI report.
[0302] Example 7 is the method of any of examples 1-6, further including replacing the first CSI resource for the CSI report with the second CSI resource for the CSI report according to the replacement indicated in the fourth message. [0303] Example 8 is the method of any of examples 1-7, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to augment the first list of CSI resource configurations with a further list of CSI resource configurations.
[0304] Example 9 is the method of any of examples 1-8, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
[0305] Example 10 is the method of any of examples 1-9, further including augmenting the first CSI resource with the second CSI according to the augmentation indicated in the fourth message.
[0306] Example 11 is the method of any of examples 1-10, further including indicating, to the CU, a LTM configuration for an LTM candidate cell.
[0307] Example 12 is the method of any of examples 1-11, further including receiving, from the CU, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell; and releasing the LTM configuration based on the release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
[0308] Example 13 is the method of any of examples 1-12, further including generating a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0309] Example 14 is the method of any of examples 1-13, where the transmitting the fourth message indicating the adjustment to the first CSI resource is based on the releasing the LTM configuration, the adjustment being at least one of a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource available for the CSI report, or an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
[0310] Example 15 is a method of wireless communication at a CU of a base station, comprising: transmitting, to a DU of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of CSI resource configurations for a CSI report; receiving, from the DU, a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being associated with the first list of CSI resource configurations; transmitting, to a UE, a first indication of the second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report; transmitting, to the DU, a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and receiving, from the DU based on the third message, a fourth message comprising a CSI report configuration indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, wherein the CSI report configuration includes a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations^the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0311] Example 16 is the method of example 15, where the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
[0312] Example 17 is the method of any of examples 15-16, where the third message further indicates a third list of CSI resource configurations, the modification being to release the third list of CSI resource configurations from the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0313] Example 18 is the method of any of examples 15-17, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report.
[0314] Example 19 is the method of any of examples 15-18, further including receiving, from the DU, a LTM configuration for an LTM candidate cell; and transmitting, to the DU, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
[0315] Example 20 is the method of any of examples 15-19, further including receiving, from the DU, a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
[0316] Example 21 is the method of any of examples 15-20, further including transmitting, to the UE, a release message indicating the release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report. [0317] Example 22 is the method of any of examples 15-21, further including transmitting, to the UE, a second indication indicting the CSI report configuration release list.
[0318] Example 23 is the method of any of examples 15-22, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to replace the first list of CSI resource configurations with a different list of CSI resource configurations.
[0319] Example 24 is the method of any of examples 15-23, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource, the second CSI resource being available for the CSI report.
[0320] Example 25 is the method of any of examples 15-24, further including transmitting, to the UE, a replacement message indicating the replacement of the first CSI resource for the CSI report with the second CSI resource for the CSI report.
[0321] Example 26 is the method of any of examples 15-25, where the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to augment the first list of CSI resource configurations with a further list of CSI resource configurations. [0322] Example 27 is the method of any of examples 15-26, where the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
[0323] Example 28 is the method of any of examples 15-27, further including transmitting, to the UE, an augmentation message indicating the augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
[0324] Example 29 is the method of any of examples 15-28. further including receiving, from the first network entity, a LTM configuration of the first network entity for an LTM candidate cell; and transmitting, to the UE, a second indication of the LTM configuration of the first network entity for the LTM candidate cell.
[0325] Example 30 is the method of any of examples 15-29, further including transmitting, to the first network entity, a release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
[0326] Example 31 is the method of any of examples 15-30, where the receiving the fourth message indicating the adjustment to the first CSI resource is based on the releasing the LTM candidate cell, the adjustment being at least one of a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, a replacement of the first CSI resource with a second CSI resource available for the CSI report, or an augmentation of the first CSI resource available for the CSI report with a second CSI resource also available for the CSI report.
[0327] Example 32 is the method of any of examples 15-31, where the first network entity is a DU of a base station and the second network entity is a CU of the base station.
[0328] Example 33 is an apparatus for wireless communication for implementing a method as in any of examples 1-32.
[0329] Example 34 is an apparatus for wireless communication including means for implementing a method as in any of examples 1-32.
[0330] Example 35 is a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing computer executable code, the code when executed by a processor causes the processor to implement a method as in any of examples 1-32.

Claims

CLAIMS WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method of wireless communication at a distributed unit (DU) of a base station (174), comprising: receiving (902), from a central unit (CU) of the base station, a first message indicating a first list of channel state information (CSI) resource configurations for a CSI report; transmitting (906), to the CU (172), a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being selected based on the first list of CSI resource configurations; receiving (908. 909). from the CU (172), a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and transmitting (912, 913), to the CU (172) based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations, the fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
3. The method of any of claims 1-2, wherein the third message further indicates a third list of CSI resource configurations, the modification being to release the third list of CSI resource configurations from the first list of CSI resource configurations.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the adjustment, to the first CSI resource, indicated in the fourth message is a release of the first CSI resource for the CSI report, the method further comprising: releasing (914) the first CSI resource for the CSI report according to the release indicated in the fourth message.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to replace the first list of CSI resource configurations with a different list of CSI resource configurations.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations is to augment the first list of CSI resource configurations with a further list of CSI resource configurations.
7. The method of any of claims 1-6, further comprising: indicating (1102). to the CU (172). a lower-layer triggered mobility (LTM) configuration for an LTM candidate cell.
8. The method of claim 7, further comprising: receiving (1104). from the CU (172), a release indication for the LTM candidate cell; and releasing (1106) the LTM configuration based on the release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising: generating (910) a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
10. A method of wireless communication at a central unit (CU) of a base station (172), comprising: transmitting (1002), to a distributed unit (DU) of the base station (174), a first message indicating a first list of channel state information (CSI) resource configurations for a CSI report; receiving (1006). from the DU (174), a second message indicating a second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report, the second list of CSI resources being associated with the first list of CSI resource configurations; transmitting (1007), to a user equipment (UE) (102), a first indication of the second list of CSI resources available for the CSI report; transmitting (1008. 1009). to the DU (174). a third message indicating a modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations; and receiving (1012, 1013, 1023), from the DU (174) based on the third message, a fourth message indicating an adjustment to a first CSI resource for the CSI report based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurationsMhe fourth message including a release list to release part of the first list of CSI resource configurations.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the third message includes a UE Context Modification Request message and the fourth message includes a UE Context Modification Response message.
12. The method of any of claims 10-11, further comprising: receiving (1102), from the DU (174), a lower-layer triggered mobility (LTM) configuration for an LTM candidate cell; and transmitting (1104), to the DU (174), a release indication for the LTM candidate cell.
13. The method of any of claims 10-12, further comprising: receiving, from the DU, a CSI report configuration release list based on the modification to the first list of CSI resource configurations.
14. The method of claim 13, further comprising: transmitting, to the UE, a second indication indicating the CSI report configuration release list.
15. An apparatus for wireless communication comprising a memory, a transceiver, and a processor coupled to the memory and the transceiver, the apparatus being configured to implement a method as in any of claims 1 -14.
PCT/US2024/054120 2023-11-02 2024-11-01 Managing channel state information resource and report configurations Pending WO2025096943A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202363595661P 2023-11-02 2023-11-02
US63/595,661 2023-11-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025096943A1 true WO2025096943A1 (en) 2025-05-08

Family

ID=93566326

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2024/054120 Pending WO2025096943A1 (en) 2023-11-02 2024-11-01 Managing channel state information resource and report configurations

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025096943A1 (en)

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
JIAYING SUN ET AL: "(TP for 38.473 BLCR) Further consideration about candidate cell configuration", vol. RAN WG3, no. Toulouse, FR; 20230821 - 20230825, 11 August 2023 (2023-08-11), XP052437934, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.3gpp.org/ftp/TSG_RAN/WG3_Iu/TSGR3_121/Docs/R3-234202.zip R3-234202.docx> [retrieved on 20230811] *
JING-RONG HSIEH ET AL: "Corrections for mobility enhancement", vol. RAN WG3, no. Athens, GR; 20240226 - 20240301, 19 February 2024 (2024-02-19), XP052567429, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.3gpp.org/ftp/TSG_RAN/WG3_Iu/TSGR3_123/Docs/R3-240445.zip R3-240445 Corrections for LTM in F1AP_R18.docx> [retrieved on 20240219] *
LIWEI QIU ET AL: "(TP for LTM BL CR to TS 38.401) Solutions for LTM", vol. RAN WG3, no. Xiamen, CN; 20231009 - 20231013, 29 September 2023 (2023-09-29), XP052522130, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.3gpp.org/ftp/TSG_RAN/WG3_Iu/TSGR3_121-bis/Docs/R3-235266.zip R3-235266.docx> [retrieved on 20230929] *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4573801A1 (en) Managing radio link control protocol operation for a fast serving cell change
EP4616637A1 (en) Managing a lower layer triggerred mobility at a user equipment
WO2025096943A1 (en) Managing channel state information resource and report configurations
WO2025096964A1 (en) Configuring early timing advance acquisition and transmission configuration indicator state configuration
WO2025096315A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility configuration and reconfiguration
WO2025151568A1 (en) Managing configurations for lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025059611A1 (en) Generating a lower layer triggered cell switch configuration
WO2025024863A1 (en) Managing early timing advance acquisition
WO2025097175A1 (en) Configuring lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025117217A1 (en) Lower layer triggered mobility with contention-free random access information
WO2025117402A1 (en) Managing carrier aggregation for lower layer triggered mobility
EP4649726A1 (en) Performing a fast serving cell change based on lower layer triggered mobility (ltm)
WO2025064965A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025015326A1 (en) Configuring early timing advance acquisition
WO2025072577A1 (en) Managing mobility for a user equipment
EP4649729A1 (en) Configuring lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025151569A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility during a failure
EP4643568A1 (en) Managing serving cell change procedures for a user equipment
WO2025151561A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered cell switch and failure recovery
WO2024168099A1 (en) Managing configurations for fast serving cell changes
EP4649727A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment
WO2025014865A1 (en) Managing uplink timing synchronization
WO2025054629A1 (en) Configuring early uplink synchronization with a cell
EP4649708A1 (en) Managing a fast serving cell change in a radio access network
EP4635220A1 (en) Enabling a fast cell change with low overhead signaling

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24809136

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

DPE1 Request for preliminary examination filed after expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)